JP2022108285A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having a feature in management displaying.

SOLUTION: A game machine includes display means, a door body which can be opened and closed, detection means which can detect an open or close state of the door body, and operation means. The game machine is configured such that even when one operation is carried out to the operation means in a close detection state, display of management displaying cannot be started. Additionally, the game machine is configured such that even when one operation is carried out to the operation means with the door body being in the open state and in an open detection state, and with a game value being input, the display of the management displaying cannot be started. The game machine is configured such that even when the one operation is carried out to the operation means with the door body being in the open state and in the open detection state, and with a display related to door opening being displayed, the display of the management displaying can be started. The game machine is configured such that even when a detection state of the detection means is turned into the close detection state with the door body being in the open state and in the open detection state, and with the display of the management displaying being displayed, the display of the management displaying can be continuously displayed.

SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 20

COPYRIGHT: (C)2022,JPO&INPIT

Description

The present invention relates to amusement machines typified by pinball game machines (pachinko machines) and reel game machines (slot machines).

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game machine capable of displaying a management display for a manager of a game parlor (see, for example, Patent Literature 1).

JP 2005-296354 A

However, conventional gaming machines have room for improvement in management displays.

SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION It is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine with a characteristic management display.

A game machine according to the present invention includes a display means, a door body provided on the front surface of the game machine that can be opened and closed, a detection means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body, and an operation means. The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means, when the door body is in the open state, The detection state of the detection means can be changed to the open detection state, and the detection state of the detection means can be changed to the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation on the detection means. The display means is means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state , when a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, The display of the management display cannot be started even if the certain operation is performed on the operation means, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. Even in the above-described state, the display of the management display cannot be started even if the certain operation is performed on the operation means when the game value has been inserted. The display means is means capable of displaying an indication relating to the opening of the door, and is configured to be able to start displaying the indication relating to the opening of the door when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. In a state in which the door is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the display regarding the door opening is displayed, the certain operation is performed on the operation means. When performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the management display is displayed. The game machine is characterized in that the display for management can be continuously displayed even when the detection state of the detection means reaches the closed detection state in a state where the game machine is in the closed state.

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a gaming machine with a characteristic management display.

1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention; FIG. 1 is a front view of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention with its front door opened; FIG. FIG. 2 is a circuit block diagram of a controller of the slot machine according to Embodiment 1 of the present invention; (a) A volume setting value table showing an example of setting values for volume setting. (b) A usage table showing an example of usage of sound output means and light output means. (c) A light amount setting value table showing the relationship between the setting value of the light amount setting and the duty ratio (luminance). (a) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 1st sub-control part main process. (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of command reception interrupt processing. (c) It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a 1 ms timer interruption process. (d) is a flow chart showing the flow of 10 ms timer interrupt processing. (e) A flowchart showing the flow of DMA interrupt processing. (a) It is a flow chart showing the flow of player setting screen display processing. (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of sound control loop processing. (c) is a flow chart showing the flow of sound driver processing. (d) A flow chart showing the flow of volume switch processing. (a) is a flow chart showing the flow of administrator set value control processing. (b) is a flow chart showing the flow of volume value change processing. 1 is a diagram showing an example of a conventional volume setting method in chronological order; FIG. (a) It is the figure which showed the volume setting method which concerns on Example 1 in time series. (b) A diagram showing the volume setting method according to the embodiment 1-2 in chronological order. It is the figure which showed the conventional volume setting method in time series. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a time series of a volume setting method according to the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a time series of a volume setting method according to the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a time series of a volume setting method according to a modification of the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a time series of a volume setting method according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a time series of a volume setting method according to Example 5; (a) It is the figure which showed the volume setting method based on Example 6 in time series. (b) It is the figure which showed the volume setting method based on Example 7 in time series. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 5 of the present application; FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an outline of the invention 6 of the present application; (A) is a time-series diagram showing an example in which a display for an administrator starts to be displayed when a specific operation means is turned on when the door is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. (B) is a time-series diagram showing an example in which the display for the administrator does not start when the specific operation means is turned on when the door is in the open state and the detection means is in the closed detection state. (C) A predetermined operation is performed in a state in which the door body is open, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the management display is displayed, and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in time series in which the management display is continuously displayed even after a period of time. (D) In a state in which the door body is open, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the management display is displayed, the management display continues to be displayed even if the predetermined operation is canceled. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in chronological order. (E) Even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means in a state in which the door body is open and the detection means is in the open detection state and the game can be started, the management display is started to be displayed. It is the figure which showed the example which cannot be performed in time series. (F) In a state where the door body is in an open state and the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state, and a game can be started, when a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the management display can be started to be displayed. It is the figure which showed the example in time series. (G) When a certain operation is performed on the operating means in a state in which the door body is in an open state, the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state, and the display regarding door opening is displayed, the management display is displayed. It is the figure which showed the example which a display starts in a time series. (H) In a state where the door is open, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the management display is displayed, the power is turned off, and an operation is performed while the power is off. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which at least part of the management display that was displayed before the power was turned off is displayed when the power is turned on even when the power is turned off. . (I) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which a management display is started to be displayed by operations performed by a plurality of specific operation means. (J) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of starting display of a plurality of types of management displays by operations performed by a plurality of specific operation means. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. (a) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination, and remarks. (b) It is a diagram showing the types of the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell, and the payout corresponding to each push order. (a) A diagram schematically showing an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100. FIG. (b) A diagram showing an example of game state transition of the slot machine 100. (a) It is the figure which showed the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in a 1st chance state, and the winning probability of a transition lottery. (b) It is the figure which showed the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in a 2nd chance state, and the winning probability of a transition lottery. (c) It is the figure which showed the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in AT state, and the winning probability of a set continuation lottery. (a) It is the figure which showed an example of various navigation in a non-AT state. (b) A diagram showing an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (non-AT state). (c) A diagram showing an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (AT state). FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a display example of a navigation number counter; (a) It is the figure which showed an example of the execution period of navigation, and a non-execution period. (b) to (e) are diagrams showing examples of various notifications. (a) A diagram showing an example of modes in a normal state and count values of the navigation number counter 2 corresponding to each mode. (b) It is the figure which showed an example of the navigation compliance rate and the lottery value of each mode. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a modification of the display of the navigation number counter; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a modification of the execution period of navigation; It is the figure which showed the modification of the navigation. (a) It is the figure which showed the modification of AT state. (b) A diagram showing an example of an AT end screen displayed during an AT extension period. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side). FIG. (a) A diagram showing types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination, and remarks. (b) It is a diagram showing the types of the normal push order bell and the privilege push order bell, and the payout corresponding to each push order. (A) It is the figure which showed the transition example of the game state of AT type|system|group. (B) A diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (1) when operation navigation is ignored. (C) A diagram showing a specific example of advantageous section control (2) when operation navigation is ignored. (A) It is the figure which showed the specific example of advantageous area control (3) at the time of operation navigation disregard. (B) It is the figure which showed the specific example of ending at the time of operation navigation disregard. (C) A diagram showing a specific example of the bell hit effect. It is the figure which showed the specific example of advantageous area control (4) at the time of operation navigation disregard. (A) and (B) are diagrams showing specific examples of advantageous section control (5) when operation navigation is ignored. (C) A diagram showing an example of a three-coin bet game performed in an AT state in chronological order. (D) It is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of a two-coin bet game performed in the AT state. (A) It is the figure which showed the modification 1 of the advantageous area control at the time of operation navigation disregard. (B) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of advantageous section control when operation navigation is ignored.

BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION Embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

[Embodiment 1]
In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device may not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 opened. The main body 101 is a box-shaped body surrounded by an upper plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a lower plate 264 and a rear plate 242, and having an open front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board housing case 210 containing a main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided on the upper part of the back plate 242. Three reels 110-112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, a first sub control board housing the first sub control board constituting the first sub control unit is stored. A case 220 is provided. In addition, an external centralized terminal board 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in the bucket) is disposed on the lower plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power switch 244 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252 . The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the door is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into DC power, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies power to each of the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400, the second sub-control unit 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplied to the control unit and each device. In addition, a power storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) is provided for supplying power to predetermined parts (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after external power is cut off. there is

A medal auxiliary storage box 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal dispensing device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind it (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting a power cord 265 , and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 opened in the back plate 242 of the main body 101 . there is

The front door 102 is hinged to the side plate 260 on the left side of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276. Above the liquid crystal display device 157, a production device 160 and a production control board (illustrated) for controlling the production device 160 are provided. omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. Below the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting inserted medals, and a path 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals onto the medal receiving tray 161. there is Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 180 .

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of a game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. and a second sub-controller 500 that controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller 400 .

<Main control unit>
First, the main controller 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. This basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and stopping of the reels. A ROM 306 for storing positions, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. A WDT (watch dog timer) 314 is mounted. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and this also applies to the first sub-controller 400 and the second sub-controller 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 calculates an interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division. It determines and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 304 for each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, when the clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256×47÷8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that varies the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (main control unit main processing described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 has a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) at each interrupt time. Medal reception sensor for medals, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, checkout button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor for medals paid out from medal payout device 180, index sensor for reel 110, index sensor of the reel 111, index sensor of the reel 112, etc.).

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316 . The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect the presence or absence of passage of medals. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect the start operation by the player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Detects a put operation when The settlement button 134 sensor is provided on the settlement button 134 . When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180 . Each sensor described above may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounts of the respective reels 110 to 112. Each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has made one rotation, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 for driving solenoids provided in the medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (win line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, accumulated number display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 for driving the indicator 126, the payout number indicator 127, and the high navigation status lamp 190) is provided.

An information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control section 300 outputs an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output. In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300. The voltage monitoring circuit 330 detects that the voltage value of the power supply is a predetermined value (this embodiment). 9v), it outputs a low voltage signal to the basic circuit 302 indicating that the voltage has dropped.

The main control section 300 also has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400 and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400 . Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. Signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300 .

<Sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-controller 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller 400 based on the control commands. there is This basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a backlight lighting pattern, data for controlling various displays, and the like. are provided.

The CPU 404 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls sound output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 according to commands from the CPU 404 . An S-ROM (sound ROM) storing sound data is connected to the sound source IC 418 , and the sound data obtained from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The first sub-controller 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422. The drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123, etc.) are connected.

A drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163 is provided in the first sub-controller 400, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 according to a command from the CPU 404 .

A sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 every interrupt time.

The CPU 404 also transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-controller 500 via the output interface. The second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-controller 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. A timer 512 is mounted. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined cycle output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The second sub-controller 500 also has a ROM 506 that stores a control program and data for controlling the second sub-controller 500 as a whole, image display data, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits data for frequency division stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines an interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

A VDP 516 (video display processor) is provided in the second sub control unit 500, and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504 , generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 516 , and displays the image on the effect image display device 157 .

[Embodiment 2]
A slot machine according to Embodiment 2 of the present invention will be described in detail below with reference to the drawings.

In addition, in the second embodiment, in principle, only the configuration different from the game machines according to the first to fourth embodiments will be described in order to avoid redundant description. In principle, FIGS. 4 to 18 are used only for the explanation of the second embodiment, and even if overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the 18 has priority.

<Front door and open/close sensor>
First, the front door 102 described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2 and the open/close sensor for detecting the open/close state of the front door 102 will be described.

As shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and is a door body that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 . That is, the front door 102 is provided on the front surface of the slot machine (gaming machine) 100 and is a door that can be opened and closed. In this example, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened by inserting a key owned by an administrator (for example, an amusement store clerk, etc.) into the door key hole 140 . Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

An optical sensor (open/close sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting part and a light receiving part is provided on the right side plate 260 of the main body 101. It is configured so that a light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the door 102 can pass through.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including this open/close sensor at each interrupt time. When the front door 102 is in a closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open/close sensor outputs a signal ( For example, a low level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor indicates that it is in the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

That is, the open/close sensor is a detecting means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is closed, the detection state becomes the closed detection state, and the front door 102 is open. , the detection state becomes the open detection state.

The "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Further, it is not limited to switching between the open detection state and the closed detection state as the door body is opened and closed. Conversely, even when the door is in the closed state, the detection state may be the open detection state.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured so that the detection state changes to the closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is opened. By shielding the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor can be forced to the closed detection state.

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the open/close sensor to the closed detection state, and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. Also, when the detection means is composed of a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open/close sensor may be set to the closed detection state by bringing the magnet close.

The main control unit 300 reads the signal states of various sensors 318 in the device monitoring process, and executes error processing when an error is detected. In this example, in this device monitoring process, when the detection state of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 becomes an open detection state, a front door open error indicating that the front door 102 is in an open state is detected. is doing.

When the main controller 300 detects a front door open error, the main controller 300 transmits a command to notify the occurrence of the front door open error to the second sub controller 500 via the first sub controller 400 . In the image control process, the second sub-control unit 500 executes a process of reading out from the ROM 506 effect data for image control related to the front door open error based on the received command. As a result, the display area of the effect image display device 157 displays a front door open error display (for example, a display including character information such as "the door is open" shown in FIG. 9 and the like). That is, the effect image display device (display means) 157 can display a front door open error display (a certain error display) when the detection state of the open/close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting>
Next, volume setting and light amount setting will be described with reference to FIG.

The slot machine 100 includes sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3) and light output means (for example, various lamps 420 shown in FIG. 3) as informing means capable of informing game information and various errors. ), display means (for example, effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), movable means (for example, shutter 163 and reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1), and the like.

The slot machine 100 also includes a first operation means (for example, an administrator switch MSW shown in FIG. 17) and a second operation means (for example, an administrator switch MSW shown in FIG. 17) used to change the volume setting of the sound output means and the light intensity setting of the light output means. For example, a player switch PSW shown in FIG. 17 is provided. That is, the gaming machine (slot machine) according to the present invention comprises a plurality of types of operating means including first operating means and second operating means, which are used to change certain settings related to notification means.

Here, the volume setting for the sound output means includes, for example, the volume (sound pressure), sound quality, number of channels, frequency, etc. of the sound output from the sound output means. The amount of light output from the means (duty ratio), color, luminance, time interval between lighting and extinguishing, etc. are included.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting/first operation method>
The "first operating means" according to the present invention is a means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state of the closed state and the open state. , back knobs (rotary switches), slide switches, and the like used by administrators (game store clerks, etc.). In this example, a rotary switch is used as the first operating means, and the administrator setting value (first type of setting value) can be changed in 16 steps (scale from 0 to F). That is, the setting value of the volume setting (certain setting) related to the sound output means includes an administrator setting value (first kind of setting value) that can be changed by operating the administrator switch MSW (first operating means). included.

When the main control unit 300 accepts the operation of the administrator switch MSW, it transmits a command including the administrator setting value to the first sub-control unit 400. Upon receiving the command, the first sub-control unit 400 changes the administrator setting value. Depending on the value, the volume setting for the sound output means and the light amount setting for the light output means are performed.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command including the administrator setting value to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 that receives the command executes the received administrator setting value in the image control process. Based on the setting value, a process of reading effect data from the ROM 506 for displaying the administrator setting value (first type setting value display) indicating the administrator setting value (first type setting value) is executed. . As a result, the display area of the effect image display device 157 displays the administrator set value display (for example, the administrator set value display MD shown in FIG. 9(a)(4)). That is, the effect image display device (display means) 157 can display a display indicating the first type of set value (first type of set value display).

<Volume setting and light intensity setting/Second operating means>
The "second operation means" according to the present invention is a means provided at a position that can be operated even when the front door (door body) 102 is in a closed state. A cross key having a button and an enter button, a production button, a touch panel, etc. correspond to this. In this example, the left and right buttons of the cross key are used as the second operation means, and it is possible to change the player setting value (second type setting value) in 16 steps (scale 0 to 15). . That is, the setting value of the volume setting (certain setting) related to the sound output means includes the player setting value (second type of setting value) that can be changed by operating the player switch PSW (second operating means). included.

When receiving the operation of the player switch PSW, the main control unit 300 transmits a command including the player setting value to the first sub-control unit 400. Upon receiving the command, the first sub-control unit 400 performs the player setting. Depending on the value, the volume setting for the sound output means and the light amount setting for the light output means are performed.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 transmits a command including the player setting value to the second sub-control unit 500, and the second sub-control unit 500 that has received the command, in the image control process, Based on the setting value, a process of reading effect data from the ROM 506 for displaying the player setting value (second type setting value display) indicating the player setting value (second type setting value) is executed. . As a result, the player set value display (for example, the player set value display PD shown in FIG. 9(a)(2)) is displayed in the display area of the effect image display device 157. FIG. That is, the effect image display device (display means) 157 can display a display indicating the second type of setting value (second type of setting value display).

Note that the first operating means and the second operating means according to this example are means used for changing both the volume setting and the light intensity setting, but the first operating means and the second operating means according to the present invention The operation means is not limited to this, and may be a means used for changing either one of the volume setting and the light intensity setting, or for settings other than the volume setting and the light intensity setting (for example, settings related to the display means). It may be the means used.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting/various tables>
FIG. 4A is a volume setting value table showing an example of volume setting values. FIG. 4(b) is a usage table showing an example of the usage of the sound output means and the light output means, and FIG. 4(c) shows the relationship between the set value of the light amount setting and the duty ratio (brightness). It is a light amount setting value table.

The method of measuring the volume specified in the volume setting value table is not particularly limited. For example, the sound volume is measured by attaching the sensor to a position near the head of a tall player (a position approximately 700 mm above the seat).

The slot machine 100 changes the administrator setting value (first type setting value) by operating the manager switch MSW, or changes the player setting value (second type setting value) by operating the player switch PSW. By changing , the volume setting for the sound output means (in this example, the setting for the volume (sound pressure) of the sound output from the sound output means) and the light intensity setting for the light output means (in this example, from the light output means It is possible to set the amount of light to be output (duty ratio).

The first sub-control unit 400 stores various tables shown in FIG. Volume setting and light intensity setting are performed based on

In this example, as shown in the usage table of FIG. 4B, among the administrator setting values (0 to F), "5" to "F" are used for normal business (normal mode), and "4 ' is used for power saving mode A, '3' is used for power saving mode B, '1' and '2' are used for development and promotion, and '0' is used for application .

<Volume setting and light intensity setting / for normal business use (normal mode)>
When the administrator setting value is "F", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 93 dB. That is, when the volume setting screen (for example, the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 8(a)(1)) is displayed, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 93 dB) as a default. In the figure, the default value of the scale (sound pressure) for each setting is surrounded by a thick frame. In the setting "F", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 85 dB to 100 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values.

Further, when the setting is "F", the light amount setting initial value is set to "bright (duty ratio 100%)" with the highest light amount. The amount of light can be adjusted by selecting and confirming any of the rectangular images (dark, medium, bright) on the light amount setting screen. (duty ratio 100%)”.

When the administrator setting value is "E", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 86 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 86 dB) as a default. In the setting "E", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 78 dB to 93 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to the player set value scales 0 to 15, respectively. In addition, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same as when setting "F".

When the administrator setting value is "D", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 79 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 79 dB) as a default. In the setting "D", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 71 dB to 86 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to the scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values. In addition, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same as when setting "F".

When the administrator setting value is "C", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 72 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 72 dB) as a default. In the setting "C", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 64 dB to 79 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values. In addition, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same as when setting "F".

When the administrator setting value is "B", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 65 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 65 dB) as a default. In the setting "B", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 57 dB to 72 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values. In addition, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same as when setting "F".

When the administrator setting value is "A", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 58 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 58 dB) as a default. In the setting "A", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 50 dB to 65 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values.

Further, when the setting is "A", the light intensity setting initial value is set to "medium (duty ratio 70%)" which is lower in light intensity than "bright (duty ratio 100%)". The amount of light can be adjusted by selecting and confirming any of the rectangular images (dark, medium, bright) on the light amount setting screen. (Duty ratio 70%)”.

When the administrator setting value is "9", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 51 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 51 dB) as a default. At the setting "9", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 43 dB to 58 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to the scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values. In addition, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same as in setting "A".

When the administrator setting value is "8", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 44 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 44 dB) as a default. At the setting "8", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 36 dB to 51 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values. In addition, the initial value for setting the amount of light is the same as in setting "A".

When the administrator setting value is "7", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 37 dB. That is, when the screen is shifted to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 37 dB) as a default. In the setting "7", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 29 dB to 44 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to the player set value scales 0 to 15, respectively.

Further, when the setting is "7", the light intensity setting initial value is set to "dark (duty ratio 40%)" which is lower in light intensity than "medium (duty ratio 70%)". The amount of light can be adjusted by selecting and confirming any of the rectangular images (dark, medium, bright) on the light amount setting screen. (40% duty ratio)”.

When the administrator setting value is "6", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 30 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 30 dB) as a default. At the setting "6", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 22 dB to 37 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to each of the scales 0 to 15 of the player setting values. Also, the initial value of the light amount setting is the same as when the setting is "7".

When the administrator setting value is "5", the volume setting initial value is set to 8, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 23 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 8 (sound pressure 23 dB) as a default. At the setting "5", the sound pressure can be adjusted to each level of 15 dB to 30 dB at intervals of 1 dB corresponding to the player set value scales 0 to 15, respectively. Also, the initial value of the light amount setting is the same as when the setting is "7".

As described above, if the administrator setting value is in the range of "5" to "F" for normal business, the lower the setting (the closer to "5"), the default volume and the default Lowers the set brightness.

In this example, in normal business use (normal mode), the player setting value of volume is set to scale 8 as default, but either scale 0 to 7 or 9 to 15 is set as default. good too. In addition, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, an example is shown in which the player set value for volume is set to the default scale (8 in this example). If the administrator setting value is changed from D to F while the setting screen is not displayed, immediately after the transition to the volume setting screen, the administrator setting value is F and the player setting value is the previous value. When the sound pressure corresponding to 10 (95 dB in this example) is set and a predetermined time has passed, the administrator setting value is F and the player setting value corresponds to the default scale (8 in this example). It may be configured to set the sound pressure (93 dB in this example).

<Volume setting and light intensity setting/power saving>
When the administrator setting value is "4", the operation mode is set to the power saving mode A, the volume setting by the player is disabled, and the sound pressure is fixed at 60 dB. Further, when the administrator setting value is "4", the player cannot set the light amount, and the light amount setting initial value is the minimum brightness that can be set when the administrator setting value is "5" to "F". (That is, the minimum luminance that can be set by the player) is fixed to "extremely dark (duty ratio 10%)" which is lower than "dark (duty ratio 40%)".

When the administrator setting value is "3", the operation mode is set to power saving mode B, and the initial sound pressure value is lower than the sound pressure 60 dB when the administrator setting value is "4". Set to 0 dB (muted). Also, when the administrator setting value is "3", the player cannot set the sound volume, and the sound pressure is fixed at 0 dB. Also, when the administrator setting value is "4", the player cannot set the light amount. %)” is fixed to “OFF (duty ratio 0%)”.

As described above, in the power saving modes A and B, the player cannot set the volume and the amount of light. In this example, the power saving modes A and B are set by operating the manager switch PSW, but the power saving mode is set in accordance with predetermined operations such as setting confirmation and setting change of the slot machine 100 by the game clerk. Power modes A and B may be settable.

<Volume setting and light intensity setting/for development and sales promotion>
When the administrator setting value is "2" (for development and promotion), the volume setting initial value is set to 2, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 70 dB. That is, when the screen transitions to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 2 (70 dB) as a default. When the administrator setting value is "2", the sound pressure level that can be adjusted on the volume adjustment screen is different from any of the settings "5" to "F". Scales 1 to 15 of player setting values correspond to sound pressures of 64 dB, 70 dB, 74 dB, 77 dB, 80 dB, 83 dB, 86 dB, 87 dB, 88 dB, 89 d, 90 dB, 91 dB, 92 dB, 93 dB and 94 dB, respectively. Also, the initial light amount setting value is “bright (duty ratio 100%)”, which is the same as the settings “B” to “F”.

When the administrator setting is "1" (for development and promotion), the initial volume setting is set to 1 and the initial sound pressure is set to 64 dB. That is, when the screen is changed to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 1 (64 dB) as a default. It should be noted that the sound pressure corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 of the player setting value and the initial light intensity setting value are the same as when the administrator setting value is "2".

<Volume setting and light intensity setting / for application>
When the administrator setting value is "0" (for application), the volume setting initial value is set to 0, and the sound pressure initial value is set to 0 dB. When transitioning to the volume setting screen, the player's volume setting value is set to scale 0 (0 dB) as a default. It should be noted that the sound pressure corresponding to each of the scales 1 to 15 of the player setting value and the initial light intensity setting value are the same as when the administrator setting value is "2".

<Main processing of the first sub-controller>
Next, the first sub-controller main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(a). FIG. 5(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the main processing of the first sub-controller.

When a reset signal is input from a reset circuit (not shown), the first sub-controller 400 is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes processing according to a control program pre-stored in the ROM 406 . First, in step S4001, initialization is performed. In this initialization, initialization of input/output ports, initialization processing of various variables (including processing for initializing a variable CNT to 0, which will be described later), and the like are performed.

In step S4003, it is determined whether or not the variable CNT stored in the RAM 408 is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (33 in this example). Execute the process repeatedly. Here, the variable CNT is a variable that is incremented every 1ms in the 1ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later. Therefore, the process of determining whether or not the variable CNT is equal to or greater than a predetermined value (33 in this example) in step S4003 is performed after 33 ms has elapsed since the variable CNT was initialized to 0 in step S4001 or step S4005. It is synonymous with the process of determining whether or not. In step S4005, after initializing the variable CNT to 0, the process proceeds to step S4007. Note that the processing of step S4003 is not limited to this example, and for example, the main loop processing (steps S4005 to S4023) may be executed three times in 100 ms (30 times in one second).

In step S4007, liquid crystal reception driver processing is performed. In this liquid crystal reception driver processing, a command received from a liquid crystal control unit (not shown) (a control unit that controls the effect image display device 157) is processed. In step S4009, effect control driver processing is performed. In this effect control receiving driver process, the command received from the second sub-control unit 500 is processed.

In step S4011, a production control main loop process is performed. In this effect control main loop processing, an unprocessed command received by a command reception interrupt process, which will be described later, is acquired from a command storage area provided in the RAM 408, a process corresponding to the unprocessed command is performed, and a predetermined effect execution timing is obtained. It controls lamps and sounds based on the data.

In step S4013, lamp control main loop processing is performed. In this lamp control main loop process, control related to the lamp is performed based on the lamp data set in the effect control main loop process of step S4011. In step S4015, sound control main loop processing is performed. In this sound control main loop process, control related to sound (sound) is performed based on the sound data set in the effect control main loop process of step S4011.

In step S4017, lamp driver processing is performed. In this lamp driver process, light output from various lamps 420 is controlled based on the lamp control information set in the lamp control main loop process of step S4013. In step S40190, sound driver processing is performed. In this sound driver processing, sounds output from the speakers 272 and 277 via the sound source IC 418 are controlled based on the sound control information set in the sound control main loop processing of step S4015.

In step S4021, liquid crystal communication driver processing is performed. In this liquid crystal communication driver processing, processing for transmitting a command to a liquid crystal control unit (not shown) and the like are performed. In step S4023, effect control unit communication driver processing is performed. In this effect control communication driver process, after performing a process of transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500, etc., the process proceeds to step S4003.

The first sub-control unit 400 repeats the processing of steps S4003 to S4023 except for interruption due to command reception interrupt processing, 1 ms timer interrupt processing, 10 ms timer interrupt processing, or DMA interrupt processing, which will be described later. .

<Command reception interrupt processing>
Next, command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(b). FIG. 5B is a flow chart showing the flow of command reception interrupt processing.

This command reception interrupt process is a process that is triggered by a command reception interrupt that occurs when the first sub control unit 400 receives a command from the main control unit 300 . In step S4101, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command, and then the process ends.

<1 ms timer interrupt processing>
Next, the 1ms timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(c). FIG. 5(c) is a flow chart showing the flow of the 1 ms timer interrupt process.

The first sub-control unit 400 has a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once in a predetermined time (1 ms in this example). do. In step S4201, the process ends after the process of adding 1 to the variable CNT provided in the RAM 406 is performed.

<10 ms timer interrupt processing>
Next, the 10 ms timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(d). FIG. 5(d) is a flow chart showing the flow of the 10ms timer interrupt process.

The first sub-control unit 400 is equipped with a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt once in a predetermined time (10 ms in this example). do. In step S4301, the first sensor reading process is performed, and in the next step S4303, the second sensor reading process is performed, and then the process ends. Here, in the first sensor reading process, for example, a detection signal of the shutter sensor 428 is acquired via the sensor circuit 426 (see FIG. 3), and a process of storing the acquired detection signal in the RAM 408 is performed. Also, in the second sensor reading process, the detection signals of other switches are acquired, and the acquired detection signals are stored in the RAM 408. <DMA interrupt process>
Next, DMA interrupt processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-controller 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 5(e). FIG. 5(e) is a flow chart showing the flow of DMA interrupt processing.

The first sub-controller 400 has a hardware timer that generates a DMA interrupt that indicates the end of DMA transfer, and uses this DMA interrupt as a trigger to execute DMA interrupt processing. In step S4401, the process ends after performing various processes associated with the end of the DMA transfer.

<Volume setting screen display processing>
Next, the volume setting screen display process executed in the effect control main loop process (step S4011) in the first sub-control unit main process will be described with reference to FIG. 7(a). FIG. 7(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the volume setting screen display process.

In step S4501, it is determined whether or not the volume setting screen display start condition is satisfied. In step S4503, after starting to display the volume setting screen, the process proceeds to step S4505. Here, the volume setting screen display start condition is, for example, when a specific operation means is operated during demonstration display, or when a specific operation means is operated other than during a jackpot game.

In step S4505, it is determined whether or not the condition for ending display of the volume setting screen is satisfied. In step S4507, the process ends after the volume setting screen is displayed. Here, the condition for ending display of the volume setting screen is, for example, when a specific operation means is operated.

<Sound control main loop processing>
Next, the sound control main loop processing (step S4015) in the main processing of the first sub-controller will be described with reference to FIG. 7(b). FIG. 7B is a flowchart showing the flow of sound control loop processing.

In step S4601, sound data update processing is performed. In this sound data update processing, control such as reproduction and stop of the sound included in the performance set in the performance control main loop processing, and processing such as fade-in, fade-out and panning are performed for the sound being reproduced. Also, in the next step S4603, volume switch processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this volume switch process, the volume is changed by the player switch PSW.

<Sound driver processing>
Next, the sound driver processing (step S4019) in the main processing of the first sub-controller will be described with reference to FIG. 7(c). FIG. 7C is a flowchart showing the flow of sound driver processing.

In step S4701, administrator setting value control processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this administrator setting value control processing, update processing of administrator setting values and the like are performed. In step S4703, other sound driver processing (initialization processing of sound source IC 418, diagnostic processing, error processing, etc.) is performed, and then the processing ends.

<Volume switch processing>
Next, volume switch processing (step S4603) in the above-described sound control main loop processing will be described with reference to FIG. 7(d). FIG. 6(d) is a flow chart showing the flow of volume switch processing.

In step S4801, volume value change processing is performed. Although the details will be described later, in this volume value change process, a volume change process or the like is performed by the administrator switch PSW. In step S1302, the process ends after performing other volume switch processes.

<Administrator setting value control processing>
Next, the administrator setting value control processing (step S4701) in the sound driver processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 7(a). FIG. 7(a) is a flow chart showing the flow of the administrator set value control process.

In step S5001, the current port value stored in the RAM 408 is saved in the previous port value stored in the RAM 408. In step S5003, the signal output from the administrator switch PSW is read and set to the current port value. do.

In step S5005, the current port value and the previous port value are compared, and if the values are the same, the process proceeds to step S5007. finish. In step S5007, 1 is added to the variable F_CNT stored in the RAM 408, and in the next step S5009, it is determined whether or not the variable F_CNT is 15 or more. If the result of determination is 15 or more, the value currently stored in the port value is stored in the administrator setting value stored in the RAM 408 in step S5011, and the variable F_CNT is initialized to 0 in step S5013. to end the process.

<Volume value change processing>
Next, the volume value change processing (step S4801) in the volume switch processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. 7B. FIG. 7(b) is a flow chart showing the flow of volume value change processing.

In step S4901, the detection signal of the administrator switch PSW is acquired, and the acquired detection signal is stored in the RAM 408 as the current administrator setting value. In step S4903, it is determined whether or not the current administrator setting value acquired in step S4901 and the previous administrator setting value stored in the RAM 408 match. to step S4905.

At step S4905, the above-described player setting value is obtained, and at step S4907, 1 is set to variable CH_CNT. In step S4909, the processes of steps S4911 to S4917 are repeated until the variable CH_CNT becomes 1 to 32.

In step S4911, it is determined whether or not there is a phrase being output to the channel (CH_CNT). In step S4913, the volume of the channel (CH_CNT) is calculated, and in the next step S4915, processing for setting the volume of the channel (CH_CNT) is performed, and then the flow advances to step S4917. In step S4917, 1 is added to CH_CNT, and then the process proceeds to step S4909.

In step S4919, the previous administrator setting value is updated by setting the current administrator setting value to the previous administrator setting value, and then the process ends.

<Conventional volume setting method>
Next, a conventional volume setting method will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 8 is a diagram showing an example of a conventional volume setting method in chronological order.

Here, a supplementary explanation of the terms used in the subsequent drawings will be given. The "door body open state" indicates that the front door 102 is in an open state (open state), and the "door body closed state" indicates that the front door 102 is in a closed state (closed state). "Open detection state" indicates that the detection state of the open/close sensor is the open detection state, and "closed detection state" indicates that the detection state of the open/close sensor is the closed detection state.

Also, "BGM" is the sound output from the speakers (sound output means) 272, 277 during the execution of a certain effect, etc., and "operation sound" is the sound output from the speaker when a certain operation means is operated. (sound output means) 272 and 277, and "error sound" is a sound output from speakers (sound output means) 272 and 277 when an error occurs. .

In addition, the "cross key" is the above-mentioned first operation means (means provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 is in the open state, out of the closed state and the open state). The "rear knob" is the above-mentioned second operating means (means provided at a position that can be operated even when the front door 102 is closed).

<Conventional Volume Setting Method/First Method>
FIG. 8(a) is a diagram showing a first method among conventional volume setting methods in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 8(a)(1) shows a state in which the administrator changes the player setting value using the cross key while the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. . When the front door 102 is opened in this state, as shown in FIG. 8(a)(2), the front door 102 shifts to the door body open state, the open/close sensor shifts to the open detection state, and a front door open error occurs. . Then, the open/close sensor shifts to the open detection state, and a front door open error occurs, so an error sound (in this example, a sound saying "the door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and an effect image is generated. In the display area of the display device 157, a front door open error display (in this example, a display including character information such as "the door is open") is displayed.

8(a) and 8(3) show a state in which the administrator changes the administrator setting value using the back knob while the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. there is When the front door 102 is closed in this state, as shown in FIG. BGM is output at a volume corresponding to the changed administrator setting value (3 in this example).

The states shown in FIGS. 8(a) and 8(5) show a state in which the administrator changes the player setting value using the cross key while the front door 102 is in the closed state and the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state. This is the same state as in FIG. 8(a)(1). 8(a) (6) to (7) are states in which the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state. The changed state is shown, which is the same state as in FIG. 8(a) (2) to (3).

In an amusement arcade, in order to confirm the sound volume setting of the gaming machine, for example, after changing the administrator setting value by one step from the minimum value 0 (0→1), the player setting value is changed from 0 in ascending order. (0→…→8→9→…→15), and after changing the administrator set value by one step (1→2), the player set value is changed in ascending order from 0 (for example, 0→…→8→ 9→...→15) may be repeated until the administrator set value reaches the maximum value F.

When performing such volume setting work, in the first method, the front door 102 cannot be changed (operating the back knob) while the front door 102 is closed. It is necessary to shift to the open state, but since the player set value cannot be confirmed (displayed) in this door closed state, after the front door 102 is shifted to the door closed state again, the player set value need to be changed (using the four-way controller). That is, in the first method, it is necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the work of setting the sound volume, which causes the problem that the work of setting the sound volume takes time.

<Conventional Volume Setting Method/Second Method>
FIG. 8(b) is a diagram showing a second conventional volume setting method in chronological order. Since the states shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 8B are the same as the states shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 8A, description thereof will be omitted.

The opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured such that a detection state changes to a closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in an open state by performing a predetermined operation.

The state shown in FIG. 8(b)(3) shows a state in which the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the administrator performs a predetermined operation to change the open/close sensor to the closed detection state. In this state, the front door 102 is open, but the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, so that the administrator can change the set value (operate the back knob).

Therefore, in the second method, there is no need to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the operation of setting the volume, and the work time for setting the volume is shortened compared to the first method described with reference to FIG. 8(a). be able to. In addition, since the front door opening error can be canceled by a predetermined operation, the work can be efficiently performed without outputting an error sound or displaying the front door opening error display.

However, in the second method, in addition to eliminating the front door open error display, etc., which serves as a separator between changing the administrator's setting value (operation of the back knob) and changing the player's setting value (operation of the cross key), Since the display of the volume setting screen is continued, there is a new problem that, for example, an operation error as shown in FIG. 8(c) occurs.

In the example shown in FIG. 8(c), in order to check the volume setting of the gaming machine, after changing the administrator setting value by one step from 3 (3→4), the player setting value is changed from 0 in ascending order. (0→...→8→9→...→15) and intended to check the volume after change, but as shown in FIG. Instead, the administrator setting value is changed from 4 to 5.

In this way, the second method has the advantage of being able to shorten the work time for setting the volume, etc., but it does operation) becomes unclear, there is a problem that an operation error is induced and one of the operations is skipped.

<Volume setting method of the present invention>
Next, the volume setting method of the present invention will be described.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 1>
FIG. 9A is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the first embodiment in chronological order.

Here, a supplementary explanation of the terms used in the subsequent drawings will be given. "Administrator setting value" indicates an administrator setting value (first type of setting value) that can be changed by operating an administrator switch MSW (first operating means), and "player setting value" indicates a game A player setting value (second type of setting value) that can be changed by operating the player switch PSW (second operating means) is shown, and the "volume value" is output from the speakers (sound output means) 272, 277. indicates the sound pressure of the sound that

"Operating state" indicates the operating state (game state, etc.) of the slot machine 100, "Operation" indicates the content of an operation on a certain operation means or the front door 102, and "Display example" indicates an effect image. An example of display contents displayed in the display area of the display device (display means) 157 is shown.

The state shown in FIG. 9(a)(1) is when the slot machine 100 is not playing, the front door 102 is closed, and the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state. 10, and from the speakers 272 and 277, BGM (in this example, the sound corresponding to the effect during stop) is output at a volume (81 dB in this example) corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value. , the display area of the effect image display device 157 shows a state in which the stop effect is displayed.

In the state shown in FIG. 9(a)(1), when an operation of a certain operation means (determination button in this example; not shown) is accepted, the volume can be set by operating the player switch PSW. Then, the display area of the effect image display device 157 displays a volume setting screen as shown in FIG. 9(a)(2). In the volume setting screen of this example, a display suggesting that the volume can be set (in this example, a display including character information such as "volume setting screen"), and a player setting value display PD ( In this example, a display including information on the player setting value such as "volume: 10" is displayed.

In addition, when the front door 102 is closed, the sound volume can be set by operating the player switch PSW. Therefore, when the right button of the player switch PSW is operated, the player setting value is increased by one step. , when the operation of the left button of the player switch PSW is accepted, the player setting value is decreased by one step.

In the example shown in FIG. 9(a) (3), since the operation of the right button of the player switch PSW is accepted, the player setting value is increased by one step from 10 to 11, and the speaker 272, 277 outputs , BGM (in this example, the sound corresponding to the effect during stop) is output at a volume (82 dB in this example) corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value, and the display area of the effect image display device 157 is changed A display player setting value PD indicating the subsequent player setting value (in this example, a display including information on the player setting value such as "volume: 11") is displayed.

When the administrator opens the front door 102 in this volume setting enabled state, the front door 102 shifts to the door body open state and the open/close sensor shifts to the open detection state, as shown in FIGS. , front door open error. Then, the open/close sensor shifts to the open detection state, and a front door open error occurs, so an error sound (in this example, a sound saying "the door is open") is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and an effect image is generated. In the display area of the display device 157, a front door open error display ED (in this example, a display including character information such as "the door is open") is displayed in an overlapping manner in front of the display of the volume setting screen.

Here, in this example, in the state shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the BGM is output at a volume (82 dB in this example) corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value. ) In the state shown in (4), since the front door opening error occurs, the volume of the error sound is set in advance instead of the volume (82 dB in this example) corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value. An error sound is output at the set volume (100 dB in this example). The volume of the error sound may be lower than the volume corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value.

In addition, in the state shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B, the front door 102 is in the open state, and the volume can be set by operating the manager switch (first operation means) MSW. An administrator setting value display MD indicating the administrator setting value (in this example, a display including an icon simulating a speaker and information of the administrator setting value such as "D") is displayed.

Here, in this example, in the closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. In the open state of the front door 102 shown in 9(a)(4), in addition to the player setting value display PD indicating the player setting value, the manager setting value display MD indicating the manager setting value is displayed. do.

In addition, in the open state of the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 9(a) and 9(4), the sound volume can be set by the administrator switch MSW. The administrator setting value is increased by one step, and when the administrator switch MSW is rotated leftward, the administrator setting value is decreased by one step.

In the example shown in FIG. 9(a)(6), since the administrator switch MSW is rotated to the right, the administrator setting value is increased by two steps from D to F, and the effect image display device 157 is turned on. In the display area of , a display administrator setting value MD indicating the changed administrator setting value (in this example, a display including an icon simulating a speaker and information on the administrator setting value such as "F") is displayed. Even if the administrator setting value is changed, the volume of the error sound (100 dB , a voice such as "the door is open") is output.

On the other hand, in the open state of the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 9(a)(4), the volume cannot be set by the player switch PSW. Even if the operation of the right button of the switch PSW is accepted, the player setting value is not changed, and the player setting value display PD indicating the player setting value is also not changed.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 1-2>
FIG. 9B is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the embodiment 1-22 in chronological order. The state shown in FIG. 9(b)(1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 9(a)(1), so the description thereof will be omitted.

In the state shown in FIG. 9(b)(2), the front door 102 is opened by the administrator, the front door 102 shifts to the door body open state, the open/close sensor shifts to the open detection state, and a front door open error occurs. is.

As described with reference to FIG. 9A, in the closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. is accepted, the state shifts to a volume setting possible state in which the volume can be set by operating the player switch PSW. (Decision button in this example; not shown) has been accepted, so the state has not shifted to the volume setting enabled state in which the volume can be set.

On the other hand, in the open state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. 9(b)(2), the volume can be set by the administrator switch MSW. Based on the rightward rotation of the operator switch MSW, the administrator setting value is increased by two steps from D to F. 5), BGM is output at a volume (95 dB in this example) corresponding to the administrator setting value and the player setting value. In the example shown in FIG. 9(b)(4), since the transition to the volume setting enabled state is not performed, while the administrator setting value is changed, the display area of the effect image display device 157 shows The display showing the administrator setting value of is not displayed.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 2>
Next, before describing the volume setting method according to the second embodiment, a conventional volume setting method will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a conventional volume setting method in chronological order.

As described with reference to FIG. 8(a), in the conventional volume setting method, the front door 102 is opened to change the administrator setting value, while the front door 102 is closed to change the player settings. Since it is necessary to change the value, it is necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the operation of setting the volume, which causes a problem that the operation of setting the volume takes time.

For example, conventionally, when confirming the sound volume setting of a game machine in an amusement arcade, a certain operation means (in this example, the decision button ; not shown) to shift to the volume setting enabled state shown in FIG. 11(a)(2).

Then, in this volume settable state, as shown in (a) (2) to (4) of FIG. 10, the right button of the player switch PSW is operated to change the player setting value step by step while changing the volume. is confirmed, and when the player setting value reaches the upper limit value of 15, the front door 102 is shifted to the open state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. Only one step is changed (C→D in this example).

10(a) (7) to (9), the right button of the player switch PSW is operated to change the player setting value step by step. When the player setting value reaches the upper limit value of 15, the front door 102 is shifted to the open state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. Only steps are changed (D→E in this example), and after that, it is necessary to repeat the change of the player setting value and the change of the administrator setting value (opening and closing of the front door 102) until the confirmation of the volume setting is completed. .

In such a conventional volume setting method, it is necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the work of setting the volume. There is a problem that a sound is output and a front door open error display is displayed, which causes inconvenience to the players during business hours.

Also, as shown in FIG. 10(b), originally, when the administrator setting value is E, it is necessary to check the volume while changing the player setting value from 8 to 15 step by step. Due to an operation mistake such as this, the administrator setting value was changed by two steps (D → F in this example), and the volume of 87 dB to 92 dB corresponding to the administrator setting value E and the player setting value 9 to 15 was confirmed. There were times when it would fly. In other words, in the conventional volume setting method, since the boundary between changing the manager setting value and changing the player setting value becomes unclear, there is a problem that an operation error is induced and one of the tasks is skipped.

FIG. 11 is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the second embodiment in chronological order.

For example, when the manager sets the sound volume, the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state as shown in FIG. 11(1). The volume is checked while the value is changed step by step, and when the player set value reaches the upper limit of 15, the front door 102 is opened, and the front door 102 is opened as shown in FIG. 11(2). state, the open/close sensor shifts to the open detection state.

In this example, a predetermined operation related to the open/close sensor (detection means) (in this example, an operation of inserting a light shielding piece of a certain length between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of the open/close sensor and fixing it with tape, etc.) is performed, even if the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state, the detection state becomes the closed detection state. When the front door 102 is opened and the open/close sensor detects the open state, the front door 102 is opened and the open/close sensor is detected as shown in FIG. transitions to the closure detection state.

In this state, the front door 102 is open, but the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, so that the manager setting value can be changed by operating the manager switch MSW.

According to this example, it is not necessary to repeatedly open and close the front door 102 in the volume setting operation, and the volume setting operation time can be shortened compared to the conventional volume setting method described with reference to FIG.

Further, in this example, when the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the volume setting screen (a certain setting display) is displayed, the manager switch MSW is pressed. When a certain operation is performed on (first operation means), the displayed volume setting screen (certain setting display) is terminated, but the front door open error display (error display) is not displayed. It is configured.

Therefore, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 11(4), the volume setting screen displayed when the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state ends, and the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed state. The front door open error display that was displayed in the open detection state is not displayed.

Similarly, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, as shown in FIG. 11(8), the displayed volume setting screen ends, and the front door open error display is not displayed.

As described with reference to FIGS. 8(c) and 10(b), in the conventional sound volume setting method, the boundary between changing the administrator setting value and changing the player setting value is unclear. There is a problem that a mistake is induced and one of the tasks is skipped. However, according to this example, when a certain operation is performed on the administrator switch MSW, the displayed volume setting screen is terminated. , the volume setting can be performed while accurately grasping that the setting value of the administrator setting value is changed, and an operation error can be prevented. Further, since the front door open error display is not displayed when a certain operation is performed on the administrator switch MSW, visibility is not hindered by the front door open error display. Setting work can be done efficiently.

Further, in this example, when the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the volume setting screen (a certain setting display) is not displayed, the player switch PSW is pressed. When a certain operation is performed on (the second operation means), a volume setting screen (a certain setting display) is displayed.

Therefore, when the player switch PSW is operated while the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor is in the closed detection state shown in FIG. 11(4), as shown in FIG. , the volume setting screen is displayed. Similarly, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state, as shown in FIG. 11(8), when the player switch PSW is operated, A volume setting screen is displayed, as shown.

In the conventional volume setting method, the difference between changing the administrator setting value and changing the player setting value is unclear, so there is a problem that operation errors are induced and one task is skipped. According to an example, when a certain operation is performed on the player switch PSW (on the second operating means), the volume setting screen is displayed, so that it is possible to accurately confirm that the setting value of the player setting value has been changed. It is possible to set the volume while grasping the actual volume, thereby preventing an operation error.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 3>
FIG. 12 is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the third embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, in the first game state (for example, during non-game), both the manager setting value and the player setting value can be changed, but the second game state different from the first game state (For example, during a game), it is possible to change the manager's setting value, but it is configured so that the player's setting value cannot be changed.

Therefore, in the first game state (non-game in this example) shown in (a) (1) to (3) of FIG. The player setting value can be changed by operating the player switch PSW. For example, as shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 12(a)(3), by operating the right button of the player switch PSW, the player setting value can be changed (10→11 in this example).

Also, although not shown, in the first game state (in this example, during non-game play), when the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, the administrator can operate the administrator switch MSW to Setting values can be changed.

On the other hand, in the second game state (playing in this example) shown in FIG. The player setting value cannot be changed by operating the switch PSW, and for example, even if the enter button of the player switch PSW is operated, the state does not shift to the volume setting enabled state.

12(b) (3) to (4), in the second game state (playing in this example), when the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, the administrator The administrator setting value can be changed by operating the switch MSW. For example, as shown in FIG. (D→F in this example).

According to this example, for example, in the second game state (in this example, during a game) in which the player setting values cannot be changed, as shown in FIG. When there is a desire to enjoy the effect by setting the volume to the maximum volume after sensing that the game will be started, the manager setting value is changed even in the second game state (in this example, during the game). Therefore, by requesting the manager to set the sound volume, the desired sound volume can be set, and the player's satisfaction can be improved.

Also, even in the first game state (not playing in this example) in which the player setting value can be changed, when the sound volume is determined according to both the administrator setting value and the player setting value In this case, by requesting the manager to set the sound volume, the desired sound volume can be set, and the degree of satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and in the second gaming state (for example, during gaming), it may be possible to change both the administrator setting value and the player setting value. 13A and 13B are diagrams showing the volume setting method according to the modification of the third embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, in the second game state (in this example, during a game), when the front door 102 is closed and the opening/closing sensor is in a closed detection state, the player's set value can be changed by operating the player switch PSW. For example, as shown in FIG. 13(2), by operating the determination button of the player switch PSW, the state shifts to the volume setting enabled state, and as shown in FIG. 13(3), the player switch PSW. By operating the right button of , the player setting value can be changed (10→15 in this example).

In the second game state (playing in this example), when the front door 102 is in the open state and the opening/closing sensor is in the open detection state, the manager setting value can be changed by operating the manager switch MSW. For example, as shown in FIG. 13(5), the administrator setting value can be changed (D→F in this example) by rotating the administrator switch MSW to the right.

Further, in this example, when the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, and the volume setting screen (a certain setting display) is displayed, the administrator switch MSW is pressed. When a certain operation is performed on the (first operating means), the displayed volume setting screen (a certain setting display) is terminated.

For example, as shown in FIG. 13(4), when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, the administrator setting value is increased by one step by operating the administrator switch MSW. As shown in FIG. 13(5), the displayed volume setting screen ends.

According to this example, after the volume setting by the administrator, the player can immediately enjoy the performance at the desired volume, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 4>
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the fourth embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the detection state of the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, when a specific operation is performed, a system setting screen that allows various settings related to the game machine is displayed. It is

For example, as shown in FIGS. 14A and 14C, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, a specific operation (in this example, the operation is possible even when the front door 102 is in the closed state). 14(a)(3), the system shown in FIG. A setting screen menu screen SD1 is displayed.

The menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen in this example includes a volume setting menu for shifting to a volume setting screen, a power saving setting menu for shifting to a power saving setting screen, a time setting menu for shifting to a time setting screen, and an error history screen. It consists of an error history menu that transitions to

On the menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen, when the volume setting menu is selected by operating the administrator switch PSW (in this example, a cross key or the like), the volume setting screen SD2 shown in FIGS. 14(a) and (4) is displayed. Is displayed.

The volume setting screen SD2 of this example is composed of a player adjustable menu that allows the player to set the volume and a player unadjustable menu that disables the player from setting the volume. When selected, the player setting value is invalidated, and the volume of the speakers 272 and 277 is set to the volume corresponding to the administrator setting value (for example, if the administrator setting value is F, regardless of the player setting value, The sound pressure is 93 dB corresponding to the default value 8 of the player setting value).

Further, in this example, when the front door 102 is in the open state, the detection state of the open/close sensor is in the open detection state, and the light amount setting screen (a certain setting display) is displayed, the administrator switch MSW is pressed. When a certain operation is performed on the (first operating means), the displayed light amount setting screen (a certain setting display) is terminated.

In the state shown in FIG. 14(b)(1), the administrator performs a predetermined operation with the front door 102 left open, so that the front door 102 is in the door open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. state. In this state, when the operation of the upper button or the lower button of the player switch PSW is accepted, the state shifts to the light amount setting possible state in which the light amount can be set, and the light amount setting screen LD is displayed.

When the upper button of the player switch PSW is operated while the light amount setting screen LD is displayed, the light amount increases by one step. 14(b)(4), the light amount setting screen is cleared when the administrator switch MSW is operated as shown in FIG. 14(b)(4).

According to this example, when an operation by the administrator switch MSW is accepted, the light intensity setting screen disappears even when the light intensity does not change due to the operation (for example, when the administrator setting value is changed from E to F). Therefore, when the administrator performs volume setting work, visibility is not hindered, and work efficiency can be improved. In addition, after the sound volume is set by the manager, the player can immediately enjoy the performance with the desired amount of light, and the player's willingness to play can be enhanced.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 5>
FIG. 15 is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the fifth embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, when a specific operation is performed while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume setting screen is cleared and an error message is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 15(a)(4) is a state in which the player switch PSW is operated and the volume setting screen is displayed while the front door 102 is in the door body open state and the open/close sensor is in the closed detection state. . In this example, in a state where the volume setting screen is displayed, a specific operation (in this example, an operation means provided at a position that can be operated even when the front door 102 is closed and an operation means when the front door 102 is open) is performed. 15(a) and 15(5), the volume setting screen is erased and an error occurs. A display (in this example, an error display including characters "setting error" indicating an error in the volume setting) is displayed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 15(b)(2), when a specific operation is performed while the volume setting screen is displayed, the volume setting screen is erased, and the description is made using FIG. 14(a). The menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen may be displayed.

With such a configuration, after confirming the player setting value on the volume setting screen, for example, the menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen can be shifted to the volume setting screen SD2 described with reference to FIG. 14(a). , it is possible to immediately set the player to disable the volume setting, thereby enhancing the convenience.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 6>
FIG. 16A is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the sixth embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, the volume of the payout sound can be adjusted during the payout operation of the medals, but the volume of the settlement sound cannot be adjusted during the payout operation of the medals.

Here, the payout operation is an operation of paying out medals from the medal payout device 180 shown in FIG. to output a payout sound. The settlement operation means that when the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1 is pressed, the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and the medals placed on the bet are settled, and the medals are released from the medal payout port 155 shown in FIG. It is an operation to discharge, and during this settlement operation, the settlement sound is output from the speakers 272 and 277 .

The states shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 16A are states in which the manager switch MSW is operated during the payout operation, and the manager setting value is increased by two steps from D to F. . In this example, since the volume of the payout sound can be adjusted during the medal payout operation, the volume of the payout sound is increased from 81 dB to 95 dB.

The states shown in (a) (3) to (4) of FIG. 16 are states in which the administrator switch MSW is operated during the settlement operation to increase the administrator setting value from D to F by two steps. ing. In this example, since the volume of the settlement sound cannot be adjusted during the medal settlement operation, the volume of the settlement sound is maintained at 100 dB before and after the administrator switch MSW is operated.

<Volume setting method of the present invention/Embodiment 7>
FIG. 16B is a diagram showing the volume setting method according to the seventh embodiment in chronological order.

In this example, when a certain sound is being output at a first volume and the front door open error described with reference to FIG. It is configured to change to a second volume, which is smaller, and to output an error sound at a third volume, which is higher than the second volume. In addition, even during the payout operation of medals, if a certain error occurs, it is configured such that the administrator setting value cannot be changed.

In the state shown in FIG. 16(b) (1) to (3), during the payout operation, the administrator switch MSW is operated to decrease the administrator setting value from F to D by two steps, and then the front door It shows the state in which an open error has occurred. In this example, since the volume of the payout sound can be adjusted during the medal payout operation, the volume of the payout sound is reduced from 95 dB to 81 dB.

In addition, when a front door opening error occurs in a state where a certain sound (discharge sound in this example) is being output at a first volume (81 dB in this example), the volume of a certain sound (discharge sound) is changed to a second volume (20 dB in this example) smaller than the first volume, and the error sound is output at a third volume (100 dB in this example) larger than the second volume.

According to this example, it is possible to make the error sound stand out while maintaining the output of a certain sound, and the operation (dispensing operation in this example) corresponding to the certain sound continues and the error occurs. can be reliably grasped, and convenience can be improved.

The states shown in (4) to (6) of FIG. 16B show a state in which a front door opening error occurs during the payout operation, and then the manager switch MSW is operated. In this example, when a front door opening error occurs in a state where a certain sound (discharge sound in this example) is output at a first volume (95 dB in this example), a certain sound (discharge sound) is changed to a second volume (20 dB in this example) that is smaller than the first volume, and the error sound is output at a third volume (100 dB in this example) that is larger than the second volume. .

Further, in this example, even during the payout operation of medals, if a certain error (front door open error in this example) occurs, the administrator setting value cannot be changed. Before and after the operation by the manager switch MSW, the volume of the payout sound is maintained at 20 dB, and the volume of the error sound is maintained at 100 dB.

According to this example, it is possible to make the error sound stand out while maintaining the output of a certain sound, and the operation (dispensing operation in this example) corresponding to the certain sound continues and the error occurs. can be reliably grasped, and convenience can be improved.

<Invention 5>
FIG. 17 is a diagram showing an outline of the fifth invention of the present application. As described above, the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present invention (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIGS. 1 and 17) includes display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 1 and 17) and a game machine. Provided on the front surface of the table, a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 1 and 17), and notification means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps 420 shown in FIG. 3, Shutter 163 and reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1), and first operation means and second operation means used to change certain settings (for example, volume setting, light amount setting) related to the notification means and a plurality of types of operation means, wherein the first operation means is provided at a position operable only when the door body is in the open state out of the closed state and the open state. means (for example, an administrator switch MSW shown in FIG. 17, a back knob (rotary switch) or a slide switch used by an administrator (game store clerk, etc.), and the second operation means is the door Means provided at a position that can be operated even when the body is in the closed state (for example, the player switch PSW shown in FIG. 17, the cross key used by the player, which has up, down, left, and right buttons and an enter button, and the effect button , a touch panel, etc.), and the display means displays a certain setting value (for example, 9(a) and FIG. 17, and a player's setting value PD shown in FIGS. 9(a) and 17). In a certain state where a certain screen display including the certain set value display (hereinafter referred to as "first screen display", for example, the display of the volume setting screen shown in FIG. 17 (3)) is displayed, When a certain operation is performed on the first operation means, a screen display different from the first screen display (hereinafter referred to as "second screen display". For example, FIG. 17(4) (or the first screen display disappears).

Conventionally, there are game machines that can be set by both administrator operation and player operation regarding a certain setting related to the game machine. There is a specification in which the setting range of the player operation (operation by the second operating means) is determined based on the setting value of the operation), and a specification in which the maximum setting value of the player operation is determined based on the setting value of the administrator operation. With such specifications, there are cases where the volume desired by the player cannot be obtained only by the player's operation. Since it is impossible to check whether the set value of the administrator's operation has been changed, the user is uneasy, and is sometimes dissatisfied when the desired volume is not achieved.

In this respect, according to the gaming machine according to the fifth aspect of the present application, when a certain operation is performed on the first operating means, the display is switched to the second screen display different from the first screen display, so that the first screen display is switched to the second screen display. It is possible to easily visually recognize that the operation by the operation means has been accepted. As a result, for managers such as store clerks of amusement arcades, convenience in changing certain settings is improved, and for players, it is possible to confirm that certain settings have been changed without fail. You can enjoy the game with peace of mind.

In addition, the setting value of the certain setting includes a first type of setting value (for example, administrator setting value) that can be changed by operating the first operating means and a setting value that can be changed by operating the second operating means. A plurality of types of setting values including a possible second type of setting values (e.g., player setting values) are included, and the display means displays a first type of setting values indicating the first type of setting values. means for displaying a display (for example, the administrator set value display MD shown in FIG. 9(a) or FIG. 17), wherein the display means displays the second type setting value indicating the second type setting value; means capable of displaying a value display (for example, a player setting value PD shown in FIG. 9A or FIG. 17), and the certain setting value display is one of the first type of setting value displays. and at least when the door is in the open state, at least the first type of setting value display out of the first type of setting value display and the second type of setting value display is displayed. It may be configured to be displayable.

With such a configuration, when the door is in the open state, at least the first type of set value display can be displayed. It becomes possible to do so, and the convenience can be further improved.

Further, at least when the door body is in the open state, a certain screen display including both of the first type set value display and the second type set value display (hereinafter, "second 3 screen display". For example, the display of the volume setting screen shown in Fig. 17(4) may be configured to be able to be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to change a certain setting while confirming both the first type setting value display and the second type setting value display. Convenience can be further improved.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a door open state display (for example, a front door open error display shown in FIG. 8(a)(2)) indicating that the door body is in the open state, Regardless of whether the third screen display is displayed or not, the door open state display is displayed when the door body changes from the closed state to the open state. The display means is means capable of starting display of the third screen display when the door is in the closed state, and the display means is capable of Means incapable of starting display of the third screen display (or at least the second type of set value display) in a certain case of the open state, wherein the door body is in the closed state and the third screen In a certain state in which the display is displayed, the third screen display being displayed can be continuously displayed when the door is in a different state from the open state. may be configured to

With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid a situation in which the display of the door open state is hidden by the third screen display when the door body is opened due to a fraudulent act or the like. etc. can be reliably prevented. In addition, when displaying the volume etc. first, it is necessary to display the system setting screen etc. after a predetermined period of time has passed since the end of one game (for example, after the end of payout). Because it is conspicuous, it does not pose a problem for fraud prevention.

Further, in a certain state in which the door body is in the closed state and the third screen display is displayed, when a certain operation is performed on the second operation means, the third screen display is displayed. The set value display of the second type included is configured to be updatable, and in a certain state in which the door body is in the open state and the third screen display is displayed, the first operation means When a certain operation is performed on the third screen display, the first type set value display included in the third screen display can be updated, and the door body is in the open state and the third In a state where the screen display is displayed, even if a certain operation is performed on the second operation means, the display of the second type of setting value included in the third screen display is updated. may be configured not to

With such a configuration, it is possible to clearly distinguish between a state in which the operation by the first operation means is valid and a state in which the operation by the second operation means is valid, so that mistakes in operation to change a certain setting can be prevented. can be prevented. Further, in a certain state where the door is open and the third screen display is displayed, even if a certain operation is performed on the second operation means, the third screen display included in the third screen display is displayed. Since the display of the second set value is not updated, the player can be made to recognize that only the operation by the first operation means is effective when the door is open, and the player can be given a sense of satisfaction. can be done.

Further, in a state where the door body is in the closed state and the third screen display is displayed, when the door body is in the open state, the third screen display includes the door open state display. A screen display (hereinafter referred to as a "fourth screen display") is configured to be displayed, and the fourth screen display is at least part of the second type of setting value display. is overlapped with the door open state display, and the first type set value display is not overlapped with the door open state display.

With such a configuration, the visibility of the setting value display of the second type can be reduced, while the visibility of the setting value display of the first type can be improved. is in a valid state, and mistakes in changing certain settings can be prevented.

<Invention 6>
FIG. 18 is a diagram showing an outline of invention 6 of the present application. As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIGS. 1 and 18) according to the sixth invention of the present application includes display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 1 and 18) and a game machine. A door (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 1 and 18) provided on the front surface of the stand and capable of detecting the opening/closing state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor 103 shown in FIG. 18) , magnetic sensors, proximity switches, micro switches, Hall elements, etc.) and notification means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps 420 shown in FIG. 3, shutter 163 shown in FIG. 1, reels 110 to 112), and a plurality of types of operation means including a first operation means and a second operation means used to change certain settings (for example, volume setting, light intensity setting) related to the notification means. In the amusement machine, the first operation means is a means (for example, a control device shown in FIG. 18) provided at a position that allows operation only when the door body is in the open state of the closed state and the open state. back knob (rotary switch, slide switch, etc.) used by an administrator (game store clerk, etc.), and the second operation means operates even when the door body is in the closed state. Means (for example, a player switch PSW shown in FIG. 18, a cross key having up, down, left, and right buttons and an enter button used by a player, a production button, a touch panel, etc.) provided at a possible position, and the detection When the door body is in the closed state, the means detects that the detection state is a closed detection state (for example, a state in which the detection means is detecting that it is in a closed detection state, or a signal indicating that it is in a closed detection state). The detection means can be in an open detection state (for example, the detection means is in an open detection state, or a state in which the detection means outputs a signal indicating the open detection state to the outside), and the detection By performing a predetermined operation related to the means (for example, an operation to block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and change the detection state to the closed detection state by pushing in the rod-shaped body), the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the display means displays a certain setting related to the certain setting (for example, FIG. 9(a) and the player setting value shown in FIG. PD), the display means is means for displaying an error display when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the door body is in the closed state and When the door body changes from the closed state to the open state in a state where the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the certain setting display is displayed, the detection state of the detection means changes to the open state. When the detection state is reached, the display of the setting display that has been displayed ends, and the error display (for example, the front door open error display ER shown in FIG. 18(2) or the front door open error display ER shown in FIG. front door open error display) is displayed, the door is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the certain error display is displayed When the predetermined operation is performed in the closed state, the detection state of the detection means changes to the closed detection state, and the display of the certain error indication that has been displayed is terminated (for example, FIG. 18 (3)), and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, display of the certain setting display can be started (for example, FIG. 18 (4)), in a state in which the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the certain setting display is displayed, the first operation means When a certain operation (for example, an operation to change the administrator setting value from 2 to 4 shown in FIGS. 18(4) and 18(5)) is performed, the displayed setting display is changed to The gaming machine is characterized in that it is configured so that the certain error display is not displayed even though the game ends (for example, the state shown in FIG. 18(5)).

Conventionally, there are game machines that can be set by both administrator operation and player operation regarding certain settings related to game machines. Since it is necessary to consider the volume of each type of machine, administrators should check the combination of setting values operated by administrators and set values operated by players before opening the business or setting up the machines. was going

For example, in the case of a specification in which the setting range of the player operation (operation by the second operation means) is determined based on the setting value of the administrator operation (operation by the first operation means), the setting value of the administrator operation and the player If the setting values for the operation are both in 10 stages, there are 100 possible combinations. After opening the door, changing the set value of the manager's operation to 2, closing the door, and confirming the set value of the player's operation from 1 to 10 in the same manner as before.

In conventional confirmation work, it is necessary to repeatedly open and close the door, which reduces work efficiency. There was also the fear of causing trouble. In other words, conventionally, there have been problems in that work efficiency is low and there is a risk of causing trouble to surrounding players.

Here, for example, the door open/close sensor is set to be temporarily closed, and the above-mentioned confirmation work can be performed while the door is open. Possible problem. That is, when the setting value of the administrator operation is 1, the setting values of the player operation are checked from 1 to 10, the setting value of the administrator operation is set to 2, and the setting value is set to 3. This is a problem of skipping 10 types of confirmation work when the set value of the operator's operation is 2. If it is known that the previous work is to change the set value of the administrator's operation, the next operation is to confirm the set value of the player's operation from 1 to 10, but there is no way to know it, In the past, confirmation work was often skipped.

In this respect, according to the game machine according to the sixth invention of the present application, when a predetermined operation is performed, the detection state of the detection means changes to the closed detection state, and the display of the certain error display that has been displayed is terminated. Therefore, it is not necessary to repeatedly open and close the door when changing a certain setting regarding the notification means, and the work load can be significantly reduced as compared with the conventional one. Further, when a certain operation is performed on the first operating means in a state in which the door is in an open state, the detection state of the detection means is a closed detection state, and a certain setting display is displayed, the Since the display of the setting display that has been on is terminated, the error display is not displayed. Therefore, it is possible to solve the conventional problem of skipping confirmation work. In addition, since the certain error display is not displayed, the visibility in the confirmation work is not hindered, and the certain error display is displayed when the operation by the first operation means is not performed. , fraudulent acts, etc. can be prevented.

It should be noted that "the display of a certain setting display ends" includes not only displaying behind a certain error display, but also displaying a certain setting display thinly (transparent display) to reduce visibility. It is a concept. Also, the certain error display may be a display indicating that the door is open and not an error.

Further, a certain state in which the door body is in the closed state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the certain setting display is displayed (for example, the sound volume or the amount of light can be changed (increased or decreased) state), when a certain operation is performed on the second operating means, the set value of the certain setting of the informing means changes, and the display mode of the displayed setting display also changes. In a certain state in which the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the certain setting display is displayed, the first When a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the setting value of the certain setting of the notification means is changed, but the display of the certain setting display that was being displayed may be terminated. .

With such a configuration, when the display of a certain setting display ends, it is possible to reliably recognize that the operation by the first operation means has been accepted, thereby skipping the confirmation work. can solve the problem.

In addition, second notification means (for example, effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) different from the notification means (hereinafter referred to as "first notification means". For example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3) and a second certain setting related to the second notification means can be changed by a change operation, and the display means displays a second certain setting related to the second certain setting (for example , display of the set value of the light amount of the backlight), and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the second certain setting display is displayed. is configured to be able to start the first When a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the display of the second certain setting display that has been displayed may end.

With such a configuration, it is possible to turn off the second certain setting display that is irrelevant to the operation by the first operating means, and to reliably execute the operation of changing a certain setting related to the first notification means. can be done.

In addition, a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) are provided with a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven, and a certain amount of time is provided from the start of rotation of the plurality of reels to the end of rotation of all the reels. In a state where at least the first notification means is used, a predetermined effect using at least the first notification means can be executed, and at least a certain reel stop state (for example, a non-gaming state shown in FIG. 11) in which at least the plurality of reels are not rotating middle), the certain setting can be changed by performing a certain operation on the second operating means, and a reel rotation state in which at least the plurality of reels are rotating (for example, , during a special effect during rotation shown in FIG. , at least in any of the certain reel stopped state and the certain reel rotating state, the certain setting can be changed by performing a certain operation on the first operating means. may be

In addition, control means (for example, the main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) capable of executing payout control of game media based on the result of the game, storage means (for example, a storage device) capable of storing game media, and settlement and an operation means (for example, the settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1), and when the settlement operation means is operated, the game media stored in the storage means can be settled. The notification means is sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3), the first notification means is means capable of outputting a payout sound in relation to the payout control, and the first The one notifying means is means capable of outputting a settlement sound in relation to settlement of the game media, and the payout sound is generated when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. is being output (for example, during the payout operation shown in FIG. 16(a)(1)), when a certain operation is performed on the first operating means, the volume of the payout sound being output is changeable, the state in which the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the settlement sound is output (for example, FIG. 16(a) (3 ), even if a certain operation is performed on the first operation means, the volume of the settlement sound being output may not change. The amount of change in volume of the payout sound (including 0) may be larger or smaller than the amount of change in volume of the settlement sound (including 0).

With such a configuration, it becomes possible to reliably output the settlement sound, and it is possible to prevent settlement due to fraudulent activity.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying a management setting display for an administrator (for example, the menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen shown in FIGS. 14(a) and 14(3)), and The display of the setting display for management may not be started when the state and the detection state of the detection means are the closed detection state.

In addition, the display means can be operated by a specific operation (for example, an operation means provided at a position that can be operated even when the front door 102 is closed, and a position that can be operated only when the front door 102 is open). When the operation of simultaneously pressing the provided operation means is performed, the management setting display for the administrator (for example, the menu screen SD1 of the system setting screen shown in FIG. 15 (b) (2)) can be displayed. is displayed when the specific operation is performed in a state in which the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the certain setting display is displayed. The management setting display may be displayed at the same time as the display of the certain setting display that was being displayed ends.

With such a configuration, it is possible to terminate the display of a certain setting display and immediately perform settings for the administrator, thereby improving work efficiency more than conventionally.

Further, the management setting display is a setting display related to volume (for example, the volume setting screen SD2 shown in (5) to (6) of FIG. 14B), and the state in which the administrator setting display is displayed. 3, when the certain operation is performed on the first operating means, the setting value of the certain setting relating to the volume is changed, but the setting display for administrator may not be erased. .

With such a configuration, it is possible to change the administrator setting value while the administrator setting display is being displayed, and work efficiency can be improved more than before.

<Other embodiments>
Next, another embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 23. FIG.

In principle, the symbols shown in FIGS. 19 to 23 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even if overlapping symbols are shown in other drawings, the description of the present embodiment 19 to 23 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

First, the basic configuration of the gaming machine according to this embodiment will be described.

A game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes display means, a door body provided on the front surface of the game machine that can be opened and closed, and a detection device capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body. A means and an operating means are provided.

<Basic configuration / door body, detection means>
The door body is a member that is provided on the front surface of the game machine and can be opened and closed, and corresponds to, for example, the front door 102 that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101 described with reference to FIG. Further, the detection means is means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body, and corresponds to, for example, an optical sensor (open/close sensor; not shown) composed of a light projecting part and a light receiving part.

Further, the detection means can change the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and can change the detection state to the open detection state when the door body is in the open state. is. Further, the detection state of the detection means is set to the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation on the detection means.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 1 and 2, the front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and is a door body that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. be. That is, the front door 102 is provided on the front surface of the slot machine (gaming machine) 100 and is a door that can be opened and closed.

In this example, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened by inserting a key owned by an administrator (for example, an amusement store clerk, etc.) into the door key hole 140 . Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. .

An optical sensor (open/close sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting part and a light receiving part is provided on the right side plate 260 of the main body 101. It is configured so that a light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the door 102 can pass through.

The main control unit 300 monitors the states of various sensors 318 including this open/close sensor at each interrupt time. When the front door 102 is in a closed state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open/close sensor outputs a signal ( For example, a low level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where it does not block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101, the open/close sensor indicates that it is in the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high level signal) is output toward the main control unit 300 .

That is, the open/close sensor is a detecting means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is closed, the detection state becomes the closed detection state, and the front door 102 is open. , the detection state becomes the open detection state.

The "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to an optical sensor, and may be a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Further, it is not limited to switching between the open detection state and the closed detection state as the door body is opened and closed. Conversely, even when the door is in the closed state, the detection state may be the open detection state.

Here, the opening/closing sensor according to the present example is configured so that the detection state changes to the closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is opened. By shielding the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor can be forced to the closed detection state.

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a DIP switch may be provided to set the open/close sensor to the closed detection state, and the DIP switch may be operated as the predetermined operation. . Further, when the detection means is composed of a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open/close sensor may be changed to the closed detection state by bringing the magnet closer.

<Basic configuration/operation means>
The operating means is operable means, and includes means (first operating means) provided at an operable position only when the front door (door body) 102 is in an open state, and the front door (door body). 102 is a means including both means (second operating means) provided at a position operable even in the closed state.

Examples of the first operating means include back knobs (rotary switches), slide switches, touch panels, various buttons, setting keys, etc., which are used by administrators (staff at amusement arcades, etc.). The operation includes a rotation operation, a press operation, a long press operation, a slide operation, a touch operation, and the like.

Further, when the first operation means is composed of a plurality of operation means including at least the third operation means and the fourth operation means, the rotation operation, the pressing operation, and the long-pressing operation of the third operation means are performed. , slide operation, touch operation, etc., and one or more operation of rotation operation, press operation, long press operation, slide operation, touch operation, etc. of the fourth operation means. An operation (for example, a rotation operation of the third operation means + a pressing operation of the fourth operation means, etc.) is also included in the operation of the first operation means.

The second operation means includes, for example, a cross key having up, down, left, and right buttons and an enter button, a production button, a touch panel, various buttons, etc., which are used by the player. Operation, press operation, long press operation, slide operation, touch operation, and the like are included.

In addition, when the second operating means is composed of a plurality of operating means including at least the fifth operating means and the sixth operating means, the rotating operation, the pressing operation, and the long pressing operation of the fifth operating means , slide operation, touch operation, etc., and one or more of rotation operation, press operation, long press operation, slide operation, touch operation, etc. of the fifth operation means. An operation (for example, a rotation operation of the fifth operation means + a pressing operation of the sixth operation means, etc.) is also included in the operation of the second operation means.

Furthermore, an operation combining the operation of the first operating means and the operation of the second operating means (for example, rotating operation of the first operating means + pressing operation of the second operating means, pressing operation of the first operating means) + Pressing operation (simultaneous pressing, etc.) of the second operating means is also included in the operation on the operating means.

Further, the operation means according to this example is means used for changing both the volume setting and the light intensity setting, but the operation means according to the present invention is not limited to this, and either the volume setting or the light intensity setting is performed. It may be means used for one change operation, or may be means used for setting other than volume setting and light amount setting (for example, setting related to display means).

<Basic configuration/display means>
The display means is means capable of displaying one or more types of display. For example, in addition to the liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 described using FIG. 1, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), dot matrix A display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen is applicable.

<Example of starting display for administrator>
The gaming machine (slot machine) according to this example can display a management display for an administrator, and when the door body is in an open state and the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state, a certain operation is performed on the operation means. is performed, the display for management can be started to be displayed.

FIG. 19A shows an example in chronological order in which the display for the administrator is started when the specific operation means is turned on while the door is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. It is a diagram.

Here, "operating state" in FIGS. 19 to 23 indicates the operating state of the gaming machine (slot machine). Further, the "door body closed state/door body open state" indicates whether the door body (the front door 102 in this example) is in a closed state or an open state. "detection state" indicates whether the detection means (in this example, the open/close sensor) is in the closed detection state or the open detection state.

In addition, the "non-input state/input state" refers to a state (input state) in which the number of game media (medals) that allow a game to start (for example, one) is inserted (input state), or a state in which the number of game media (medals) that allow a game to start is inserted (input state). It shows which state the medium (medal) is not inserted (non-inserted state).

Further, the "specific operation means" is one operation means out of a plurality of types of operation means (in this example, a slide switch provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door (door body) 102 is in an open state. SW) is in an on state or an off state.

In addition, "other operation" indicates an operation on one operation means out of a plurality of types of operation means, other than the operation on a specific operation means, and "error sound" means a sound output means (this In the example, the content of the voice output from the speaker) is shown, and "display example" shows an example of display on the display means (the liquid crystal display device 157 in this example).

The state shown in FIG. 19(A)(2) is a state in which the door closed state and closed detection state shown in FIG.

In this example, in the door closed state and closed detection state shown in FIG. The means (speaker) outputs an error sound (in this example, a sound notifying that the door is open, such as "the door is open"), and the stop displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) The middle effect is turned off, and an error display ED1 (in this example, a display indicating that the door is open) is displayed below the display area. Note that the error display ED1 (door open) may be overlap-displayed before the stop effect without erasing the stop effect.

19(A)(3), the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is switched from off to on in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. 19(A)(2). It is in a done state.

In this example, in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. The error sound (door open) output from the output means (speaker) is stopped (muted), and the error display ED1 (door open) etc. displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased. , a management display SD for the administrator (in this example, a display on which various settings (system settings) relating to the gaming machine can be made) is displayed.

Note that the management display SD may be displayed in an overlapping manner in front of the error display ED1 (door open) without erasing the error display ED1 (door open). Further, the operation of switching the specific operation means from off to on is not limited to this example. An operation or the like of rotating to a position where the change is possible may be performed.

Here, the administrator display SD is a screen display that is used by an administrator such as a store clerk in amusement arcades to perform various settings and operation checks of the gaming machines. , time setting, volume setting, brightness setting, etc., and the history of errors that have occurred in the past can be viewed.

19(A)(4), the operation of switching the specific operation means (slide switch SW) from on to off is performed in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. 19(A)(3). It is in a done state.

In this example, in the door closing state and closing detection state shown in FIG. The error sound (door open) is output again from the sound output means (speaker), the management display SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the error display ED1 (door open ) is displayed again.

Note that the error display ED1 (door open) may be displayed in an overlapping manner in front of the management display SD without erasing the management display SD. Also, the operation to switch the specific operation means from ON to OFF is not limited to this example. It may also be an operation of rotating from the normal position to the initial position (returning to the initial position).

The subsequent state shown in FIGS. 19A and 19B is a state in which the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIG.

In this example, in the door body open state and open detection state shown in FIG. The error sound (door open) output from the means (speaker) is stopped (silenced), and the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is turned off, The stop production is displayed again.

<Example of not starting display for administrator>
The gaming machine (slot machine) according to this example can display the management display for the manager, and cannot start displaying the management display when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detecting means is in the closed detection state. (or it may not be possible).

FIG. 19B shows an example in chronological order in which the display for the administrator does not start when the specific operation means is turned on when the door is in the open state and the detection means is in the closed detection state. It is a diagram. The states shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 19B are the same as the states shown in (1) and (2) of FIG.

The state shown in FIG. 19(B)(3) is an operation (predetermined operation) to switch the open/close sensor from the open detection state to the closed detection state in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. 19(B)(2). ) has been performed.

As described above, the opening/closing sensor according to this example is configured so that the detection state changes to the closed detection state even when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state when a predetermined operation is performed. It is Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is opened. By shielding the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor 101, even if the front door 102 is open, the detection state of the open/close sensor can be forced to the closed detection state.

In this example, in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. The error sound (door open) output from the output means (speaker) is stopped (muted), and the error display ED1 (door open) etc. displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased. , the effect during stop is displayed again.

19(B)(4), the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is switched from off to on in the door open state and closed detection state shown in FIG. 19(B)(3). It is in a done state.

In this example, in the door open state and closed detection state shown in FIG. The game machine (slot machine) according to this is configured so that the display for management cannot be started when the door is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, so the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) continues to display the effect during stop displayed in the display area.

19(B)(5), the operation of switching the specific operation means (slide switch SW) from off to on is performed in the door open state and closed detection state shown in FIG. 19(B)(4). It is a state in which a predetermined period of time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed.

In this example, the second error is generated from the sound output means (speaker) because the specific operation means (slide switch SW) has been operated (switched from OFF to ON) in the door open state and closed detection state. While outputting a sound (in this example, a sound that notifies that an abnormal operation has been performed, such as "operation is abnormal"), the stop performance displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is extinguished, and an error display ED2 (in this example, a display indicating that an abnormal operation has been performed) is displayed. It should be noted that the error display ED2 (operation error) may be overlap-displayed before the stop effect without erasing the stop effect.

19(B)(6), the opening/closing sensor is operated from the closed detection state to the open detection state in the door open state and closed detection state shown in FIG. 19(B)(5). state.

In this example, in the door open state and closed detection state shown in FIG. , the error sound (door open) is output again, and the second error sound (operation error) is continuously output. Also, the error display ED2 (operation error) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) continues to be displayed.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is provided with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game machine, A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), detection means (for example, an open/close sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door, and operation means (for example, shown in FIG. 19A) and a slide switch SW), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state. operation) is performed so that the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is configured to display a management information for an administrator. display (for example, display for administrator SD shown in FIG. 19(A)(3)) can be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, When a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the Even if a certain operation (for example, an operation to switch from OFF to ON) is performed on the operation means, the display of the management display cannot be started, and the door body is in the open state and the detection When the detection state of the means is the closing detection state and the operation is performed on the operation means, an error notification (for example, an error display ED2 (operation error) shown in FIG. 19(B)(5)) is displayed. ) is configured to be executable.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when a predetermined operation is performed, the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state, and in this state, even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means Since the management display cannot be started, there is no need to repeat the opening and closing operation of the door when checking the operation of the display means. Therefore, it is possible to prevent setting errors, fraudulent acts, and the like.

Further, in a state in which the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the certain error notification is being performed, the predetermined operation is performed, and the detection means Even if the detection state of becomes the open detection state, the certain error notification may be continuously executed.

With such a configuration, error reporting can be continued, and setting errors, fraudulent acts, and the like can be prevented.

Further, the operation means may be means provided at a position where the operation is possible only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the convenience for administrators such as store clerks of amusement arcades, and to prevent setting errors, fraudulent acts, and the like.

In addition, the certain error notification is an error notification related to the certain operation (for example, a voice that informs that an abnormal operation has been performed such as "operation is abnormal", an abnormal operation such as "operation is abnormal", etc.) It may be a display that notifies that an operation has been performed).

With such a configuration, it is possible to quickly grasp the cause of the error, and to quickly respond to setting errors, fraudulent acts, and the like.

<Example 1 of continuous display of administrator display>
In the gaming machine (slot machine) according to this embodiment, a predetermined operation is performed in a state in which the door body is in an open state, the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state, and the management display is displayed, and the detection is performed. The management display is configured to continue to be displayed even if the detection state of the means becomes the closed detection state.

FIG. 20(C) shows that a predetermined operation is performed in a state where the door body is open, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the management display is displayed, and the detection state of the detection means is FIG. 10 is a diagram showing in chronological order an example in which the display for management continues to be displayed even when a closed state is detected;

The state shown in FIG. 20(C)(1) is the same as the state described with reference to FIG. 19(A)(3). has been operated to switch from off to on.

In this example, since an operation (operation to switch from OFF to ON) is performed on the specific operation means (slide switch SW) in the door open state and the open detection state, the sound is output from the sound output means (speaker). The error sound (door open) is stopped (muted), the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the management display SD for the administrator is displayed. (In this example, a display that enables various settings (system settings) related to the gaming machine) is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 20(C)(2) is the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. In this state, an operation (predetermined operation) has been performed to change the sensor from the open detection state to the closed detection state.

In this example, when the door body is in the open state and the open detection state shown in FIG. operation (predetermined operation) has been performed, but in the gaming machine (slot machine) according to this example, the display for management is displayed when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detecting means is in the open detection state. In this case, even if a predetermined operation is performed and the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state, the management display SD is continuously displayed. displayed continuously.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 20(C)(3) is a state in which another operation is performed while the door body is in the open state, the closed state is detected, and the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is on.

In this example, since the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is in the ON state, an operation to change or confirm the set value (operation related to the set value) is possible. Setting values can be changed or confirmed by operating a cross key provided at a position that can be operated only when

In the state shown in FIG. 20(C)(4), an operation is performed to switch the open/close sensor from the closed detection state to the open detection state in the door open state and closed detection state shown in FIG. 20(C)(3). state.

In this example, in the door opened state and closed detection state shown in FIG. After outputting an error sound (door open) for a predetermined period (for example, a short period of 1 second), it stops (silences the sound), and the management display SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is continuously displayed. An error sound (door open) may be output for a predetermined period (for example, a short period of 1 second) each time the opening/closing sensor is switched from the closed detection state to the open detection state.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is provided with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game machine, A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), detection means (for example, an open/close sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door, and operation means (for example, shown in FIG. 19A) and a slide switch SW), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state. operation) is performed so that the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is configured to display a management information for an administrator. display (for example, display for administrator SD shown in FIG. 19(A)(3)) can be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, When a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the The display for management cannot be started even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. The management display can be continuously displayed even if the predetermined operation is performed in the state where the management display is displayed and the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state. This game machine is characterized by:

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, even if the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state, the management display may continue to be displayed. Convenience can be improved.

In addition, in a state in which the management display is continuously displayed, settings related to the management display may be configured.

With such a configuration, it is possible to enhance the convenience of administrators such as store clerks of amusement arcades.

Further, in a state in which the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the management display is displayed, even if the predetermined operation is canceled, the management The display may be configured to be continuously displayed.

Further, the operation means may be means provided at a position where the operation is possible only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the convenience for administrators such as store clerks of amusement arcades, and to prevent setting errors and the like.

<Example 2 of continuing to display the display for administrator>
In the amusement machine (slot machine) according to this example, even if the predetermined operation is canceled in a state where the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, and the management display is displayed, The management display is configured to be (or may be) displayed continuously.

FIG. 20(D) shows that in a state where the door body is open, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the management display is displayed, even if the predetermined operation is canceled, the management display is displayed. It is the figure which showed the example displayed continuously in time series. The states shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 20(D) are the same as the states shown in (1) and (2) of FIG.

In the state shown in FIG. 20D(3), the door shown in FIG. In the state, an operation (an operation to switch from ON to OFF) has been performed to release the specific operation means (slide switch SW).

In this example, an operation to release the specific operation means (slide switch SW) (an operation to switch from ON to OFF) was performed while the management display SD was being displayed. machine) continues to display the management display even if the predetermined operation is canceled when the door is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state and the management display is displayed. Therefore, the management display SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is continuously displayed.

In addition, the present invention is not limited to this example, and when a predetermined operation is canceled while the door is open and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state and the management display is displayed, , the management display SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) may be erased.

In the state shown in FIG. 20(D)(4), the opening/closing sensor is operated to switch from the closed detection state to the open detection state in the door open state and closed detection state shown in FIG. 20(D)(3). state.

In this example, in the door open state and closed detection state shown in FIG. After outputting an error sound (door open) for a predetermined period (for example, a short period of 1 second), it stops (silences the sound), and the management display SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is continuously displayed. An error sound (door open) may be output for a predetermined period (for example, a short period of 1 second) each time the opening/closing sensor is switched from the closed detection state to the open detection state.

From the state shown in FIG. 20(D)(4), the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state shown in FIG. 19(A)(4), and the error display ED1 is displayed. In order to shift to the on state, it is necessary to switch the specific operation means (slide switch SW) from on to off.

In this example, when the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the management display is displayed, the predetermined operation is canceled (for example, the specific operation means Convenience for administrators such as game store clerks, etc., because the management display may continue to be displayed even when the operation to switch the slide switch SW from on to off is performed. can increase

<Example of not starting to display the administrator display according to the operating state of the gaming machine>
In the gaming machine (slot machine) according to the present embodiment, a certain operation is performed on the operating means in a state in which the door body is in an open state and the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state, and a game can be started. is also configured to prevent it from starting to display administrative views.

FIG. 21(E) shows that even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means in a state in which the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the game can be started, the display for management is displayed. is a diagram showing in time series an example in which the display of cannot be started. The states shown in (E) (1) and (2) of FIG. 21 are those shown in FIG. (A) Since it is the same as the states shown in (1) and (2), the description thereof is omitted.

The state shown in FIG. 21(E)(3) is the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. has been operated to switch from off to on.

In this example, in a state (insertion state) in which the number of game media (medals) capable of starting a game is inserted (insertion state) in the door open state and the open detection state shown in FIG. 21(E)(2). The operation means (slide switch SW) has been operated (operation to switch from OFF to ON), but in the gaming machine (slot machine) according to this example, the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. In the state where the game can be started, even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the display for management cannot be started. The display of the stop effect that was displayed in the display area of , continues, and the display for the administrator does not start.

The following state shown in FIG. 21(E)(4) is the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. ) is switched from off to on, and a predetermined time (for example, two seconds) has elapsed.

In this example, an error is displayed because an operation (operation to switch from OFF to ON) is performed on the specific operation means (slide switch SW) in a state in which the door body is open and detected to be open and a game can be started. The error display ED1 (door open) continues to be displayed without performing ED2 (operation error).

21(E)(3), when the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is switched from off to on in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. 19(B) ( 6), it may be configured to shift to a state in which both an error sound (door open) is output and an error display ED2 (operation error) is displayed.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is provided with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game machine, A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), detection means (for example, an open/close sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door, and operation means (for example, shown in FIG. 19A) and a slide switch SW), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state. operation) is performed so that the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is configured to display a management information for an administrator. display (for example, display for administrator SD shown in FIG. 19(A)(3)) can be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, When a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the The display for management cannot be started even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. Even if there is a game medium, even if a certain operation (for example, an operation to switch from OFF to ON) is performed on the operation means, the display of the management display cannot be started. This game machine is characterized by:

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state and the game can be started, the management display cannot be displayed. In checking the operation of the device, etc., the visibility of the display means is not hindered, and setting errors and the like can be prevented.

Further, when the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and no game medium is inserted, the certain operation is performed on the operation means. and the management display can be started to be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to start displaying the display for management, so that it is possible to enhance the convenience of the manager such as the store clerk of the amusement arcade.

Further, the state in which game media are inserted may include a state in which the number of inserted game media is less than the game startable number (including, for example, a replay state).

With such a configuration, in a state in which a number of game media capable of starting a game has been inserted (for example, a state in which one or more medals have been inserted, including a replay state), the display for management is displayed. Since it cannot be started, the visibility of the display means is not disturbed when checking the operation of the display means, etc., and setting errors and the like can be prevented.

Further, the operation means may be means provided at a position where the operation is possible only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the convenience for administrators such as store clerks of amusement arcades, and to prevent setting errors and the like.

<Example of starting to display the display for administrator according to the operating state of the gaming machine>
In the amusement machine (slot machine) according to the present embodiment, when a certain operation is performed on the operating means in a state in which the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and a game can be started. , the display for management can be started.

In FIG. 21(F), when a certain operation is performed on the operation means in a state in which the door body is in an open state and the detection means is in an open detection state, and a game can be started, a display for management is displayed. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example in which display can be started in chronological order; The states shown in (1) and (3) of FIG. 21F are the same as the state shown in (2) of FIG. 21E, so description thereof is omitted.

The state shown in FIG. 21(F)(2) is the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. has been switched from off to on.

In this example, in a state (insertion state) in which the number of game media (tokens) capable of starting a game is inserted (inserted state) in the door open state and the open detection state shown in FIG. The operation means (slide switch SW) has been operated (operation to switch from OFF to ON), but in the gaming machine (slot machine) according to this example, the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state. When a certain operation is performed on the operation means in a state where the game can be started, the display for management can be started to be displayed, so the sound output means (speaker) is output. The error sound (door open) is stopped (silenced) and the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased to perform the second management for the administrator. A display SDa (in this example, a display that enables various settings (system sound volume setting) related to the sound volume of the gaming machine) is displayed.

On the other hand, in this example, in a state (insertion state) in which the door body is in the open state and the open detection state and the number of game media (tokens) capable of starting a game is inserted (inserted state), the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is When an operation (an operation to switch from OFF to ON) is performed and there are multiple types of management displays, at least one display for management is configured not to start displaying. ) and (4), the management display SD (system setting display) for the administrator is configured not to start displaying.

In this example, an example of displaying the second management display (system volume setting display) for the administrator is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the management display SD (system setting display) is displayed. ) and the second management display (system volume setting display), instead of (or in addition to), a third management display for the administrator (various settings related to the brightness (light amount) of the lamps and LEDs of the game machine (system A display system capable of setting brightness) may be displayed, or a player setting screen for a player (a screen for adjusting volume and brightness) may be configured so as not to be displayed.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is provided with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game machine, A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), detection means (for example, an open/close sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door, and operation means (for example, shown in FIG. 19A) and a slide switch SW), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state. operation) is performed so that the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is configured to display a management information for an administrator. display (for example, display for administrator SD shown in FIG. 19(A)(3)) can be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, When a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the Even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the display for management cannot be started, and a state in which game media are inserted (for example, one or more medals are inserted) state), when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state, a certain operation (for example, an operation to switch from off to on) is performed on the operation means. and the management display can be started to be displayed.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the game can be started, the management display can be started to be displayed. It is possible to enhance the convenience of administrators such as store clerks.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) includes display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and an openable and closable door provided in front of the gaming machine. body (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), detection means (for example, an open/close sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door body, and operation means (for example, the slide switch SW shown in FIG. 19A). and, wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means detects the door body is a means for enabling the detection state to become an open detection state when is in an open state, and a predetermined operation (for example, an operation to block the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor) is performed with respect to the detection means. Thus, even if the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. 19(A)(3), and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, When a certain operation (for example, an operation to switch from OFF to ON) is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection. In this state, even if the certain operation is performed on the operation means, the display of the management display cannot be started, and the door body is configured to be in the open state and the detection state of the detection means. Even in the open detection state, in a state in which game values have been inserted (for example, a state in which one or more medals have been inserted), even if the certain operation is performed on the operating means, The display means is configured to prevent the display of the management display from starting, the display means is means capable of displaying a display related to door opening, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open state. In the detection state, the display regarding the door opening can be started to be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detecting means is the open detection state, and the display regarding the door opening is displayed. When the certain operation is performed on the operating means in the state where the door body is in the opened state and the detection state of the detection means is changed to the opening state and the detection state of the detection means, the management display can be started to be displayed. in the open detection state and, in the state where the management display is displayed, the management display can be continuously displayed even if the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state. It is a playground to play.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the game can be started, the management display can be started to be displayed. It is possible to enhance the convenience of administrators such as store clerks. In addition, by continuing the management display in an irregular state in which a certain operation is canceled while the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, it becomes easier to discover fraudulent acts, etc. It may be possible to improve convenience for administrators.

Further, in a state in which the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state and the game cannot be started, even if the certain operation is performed on the operation means, the It may be configured such that display of the management display cannot be started.

With such a configuration, since the display of the management display cannot be started, the visibility of the display means is not hindered when checking the operation of the display means, and setting errors can be prevented. can.

Further, the state in which game media are inserted may include a state in which the number of inserted game media is less than the allowable number for game start (for example, a replay state).

With such a configuration, in a state in which a number of game media capable of starting a game has been inserted (for example, a state in which one or more medals have been inserted, including a replay state), the display for management is displayed. Since the display can be started, the convenience of the manager such as the store clerk of the amusement arcade can be improved.

Further, it may be configured such that the player setting display (for example, the display of the volume setting screen for the player) cannot be started while the game medium is inserted.

Further, the operation means may be means provided at a position where the operation is possible only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the convenience for administrators such as store clerks of amusement arcades, and to prevent setting errors and the like.

<Example of starting to display the administrator display while the door is open>
In the gaming machine (slot machine) according to this example, when the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the display regarding the door opening is displayed, a certain operation is performed on the operation means. is performed, the display for management can be started to be displayed.

FIG. 22(G) shows that when a certain operation is performed on the operating means in a state where the door is in an open state, the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state, and the display regarding door opening is displayed, FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example of starting display of a management display in chronological order; The states shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 21G are the same as the states shown in (1) and (2) of FIG. 19A, so description thereof will be omitted.

The state shown in FIG. 22(G)(3) is an operation (predetermined operation) to switch the open/close sensor from the open detection state to the closed detection state in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. 22(G)(2). ) has been performed.

In this example, in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. When the error display ED1 (door open) is displayed in the display area of , an operation (predetermined operation) is performed to change the open/close sensor from the open detection state to the closed detection state. In the slot machine), when a certain operation is performed on the operation means in a state where the door body is in an open state, the detection state of the detection means is an open detection state, and the display regarding the door opening is displayed, a management Since the display is configured to be able to start displaying, the error sound (door open) output from the sound output means (speaker) is continued, and the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) indicates that the administrator A management display SD (system setting display) is displayed, and an error display ED1 (door open) is overlapped in front of this display.

When the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the open detection state, and the display related to door opening is displayed, a certain operation is performed on the operation means, and there are a plurality of types of management displays. In this case, as shown in FIG. 22(G)(3), one administrator display (in this example, the second management display (system volume setting display) SDa) is a display related to opening the door ( In this example, the display is started while continuing the error display ED1 (door open), but as shown in FIG. The system setting display (SD) may be started without continuing (erasing) the display regarding door opening (in this example, error display ED1 (door open)).

Also, when an error other than a door open error (for example, a selector error) occurs, one administrator display (in this example, the second management display (system volume setting display) SDa) is , the display related to door opening (in this example, error display ED1 (door open)) and another error notification (selector error) continue to be displayed. display (system setting display) SD) is started without continuing (erasing) the display related to door opening (in this example, error display ED1 (door open)) and other error notification (selector error). can be anything.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is provided with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game machine, A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), detection means (for example, an open/close sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door, and operation means (for example, shown in FIG. 19A) and a slide switch SW), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state. operation) is performed so that the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is configured to display a management information for an administrator. display (for example, display for administrator SD shown in FIG. 19(A)(3)) can be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, When a certain operation is performed on the operating means, the management display can be started to be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, the Even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the display for management cannot be started. is capable of displaying an error display ED1 (door open) shown in Fig. 1, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, the display regarding the door opening can be started to be displayed. and when the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the display regarding the door opening is displayed, an operation is performed on the operation means. is performed, the management display can be started to be displayed (while continuing the display regarding the opening of the door).

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, even if the display related to opening the door is displayed, the display for management may be displayed. can be performed, and the convenience of administrators such as game store clerks can be enhanced.

Further, the display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of management displays, and one of the plurality of types of management displays is a first management display (for example, FIG. 22 (G ) (4) is a system volume setting display SDa), and one of the plurality of types of management displays is a second management display (for example, the system setting display SD), the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the display related to the door opening is displayed, When the certain operation is performed, the display of the first management display can be started (while the display related to the opening of the door is continued), and the door body detects the open state and the detection means. In the state where the state is the open detection state and the display regarding the door opening is being displayed, when the certain operation is performed on the operating means, the display of the second management display can be started. However, it may be configured so that the display regarding the opening of the door disappears.

With such a configuration, the visibility of the second management display can be improved, and setting errors and the like can be prevented.

Further, the operation means may be means provided at a position where the operation is possible only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the convenience for administrators such as store clerks of amusement arcades, and to prevent setting errors and the like.

<Example of turning on/off the power while the administrator display is displayed>
The amusement machine (slot machine) according to the present embodiment is powered off in a state where the door body is open, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the management display is displayed, and the power is turned off. Even if an operation is canceled during the off period, when the power is turned on, at least part of the management display that was displayed before the power was turned off is displayed ( or you may).

In FIG. 22(H), the power is turned off in a state where the door is open, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the management display is displayed. 6 shows in chronological order an example in which at least part of the management display that was displayed before the power was turned off is displayed when the power is turned on even if a certain operation has been canceled; It is a diagram. Since the state shown in FIG. 22(H)(1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 19(A)(3), the description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 22(H)(2) shows the state in which the door body is opened and detected to be open as shown in FIG. state (power supply is cut off).

In this example, in the state shown in (H) (1) of the same figure, in which the door body is in the open state and in the open detection state and the management display SD is displayed, an operation is performed to switch the power of the gaming machine from on to off. (or there was a power failure due to a power failure, etc.), the management display SD that had been displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) to which the power supply was interrupted has disappeared.

22(H)(3) is the state shown in FIG. 22(H)(2) in which the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is switched from on to off in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. 22(H)(2). 22(H)(4) is the state in which the operation of the specific operation means (slide switch SW) is released), and the state shown in FIG. supplied).

In this example, the management display SD disappeared when the power was turned off. Even if the power is turned off while the display for management is displayed and an operation is canceled while the power is off, the power will be turned off when the power is turned on. 22(H)(5), before the power supply is cut off. The management display SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is displayed again.

In addition, when the gaming machine is turned on (power is being supplied) as shown in FIG. 22(H)(5), an operation (predetermined operation) to switch the open/close sensor from the open detection state to the closed detection state. is performed, the management display SD that was displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) before the power supply was interrupted may be redisplayed, The displayed management display SD may be configured not to be displayed again. In addition, a part of the management display SD (for example, volume setting only) that was displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) before the power supply was interrupted is redisplayed. In addition, in the state where the gaming machine is powered on (power is being supplied) shown in FIG. When outputting a sound (for example, the sound "The power is turned on"), a sound (for example, volume It may be configured to output a loud voice or a soft voice), or may be configured to output a voice in the same manner as usual.

As described above, the game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) is provided with a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and the front surface of the game machine, A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1), detection means (for example, an open/close sensor) capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door, and operation means (for example, shown in FIG. 19A) and a slide switch SW), wherein the detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in the open state. operation) is performed so that the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state, and the display means is configured to display a management information for an administrator. display (for example, display for administrator SD shown in FIG. 19(A)(3)) can be displayed, and when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, When a certain operation (for example, an operation to switch from OFF to ON) is performed on the operation means, the display for management can be started to be displayed, and the door body is in the open state and the detection means. When the detection state is the closed detection state, even if a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the display of the management display cannot be started, the management display is displayed, and the Power is turned off while an operation is maintained, and even if the operation is canceled while the power is off, the power is turned off when the power is turned on. The game machine is characterized in that the management display that was displayed before becoming a game machine can be displayed even if the certain operation is not performed.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, the management display may be redisplayed even when the power is turned on, so that convenience for administrators such as store clerks of amusement arcades can be enhanced.

Further, the operation means may be means provided at a position where the operation is possible only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to improve the convenience for administrators such as store clerks of amusement arcades, and to prevent setting errors and the like.

Further, the display means is a means capable of displaying an initial display (for example, a display including a character string "preparing" which is always displayed when the power is turned on), and when the power is turned on, the power is turned off. The initial display may be configured to be able to start displaying before the display for management that was displayed before the initial display is displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to grasp that the power is turned on, and it is possible to enhance the convenience of an administrator such as a store clerk of the amusement arcade.

<Example of starting to display the management display by operating multiple specific operation means>
In the gaming table (slot machine) described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 22, an example of applying one specific operation means (slide switch SW) was shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of specific operation measures may be applied.

FIG. 23(I) is a diagram showing an example of starting display of the management display by operation by a plurality of specific operation means in chronological order.

Here, "specific operation means 1" in FIG. 23(I) is the first operation means of one of a plurality of types of operation means (in this example, when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state, This indicates whether the slide switch SW) provided at a position where only the switch SW is operable is in the ON state or the OFF state. In addition, the "specific operation means 2" is the second operation means of one of the plurality of types of operation means (in this example, it is provided at a position where it can be operated even when the front door (door body) 102 is in a closed state. It shows whether the produced effect button (not shown) is in the ON state or the OFF state.

In addition, the first operating means is an operating means (operating means mainly used by the player) provided at a position that can be operated even when the front door (door body) 102 is closed, and the second operating means. However, the operating means (operating means mainly used by the manager of the game parlor) provided at a position that can be operated only when the front door (door body) 102 is open may be used.

The state shown in FIG. 23(I)(3) is an operation to switch the first specific operation means (effect button) from off to on in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. 23(I)(2). has been performed.

In this example, in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. , the error sound (door open) output from the sound output means (speaker) is stopped (muted), and the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), etc. is erased to display a display containing the character string "preparing".

The state shown in FIG. 23(I)(4) is that the second specific operation means (slide switch SW) is turned from off to on in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. 23(I)(3). A switching operation has been performed.

In this example, the second specific operation means (slide switch SW) is operated (switched from off to on) in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. , the display displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the management display SD for the administrator (in this example, a display that allows various settings (system settings) related to the game machine) is displayed.

FIG. 23(J) is a diagram showing in chronological order an example of starting display of a plurality of types of management displays by operations performed by a plurality of specific operation means.

Here, the "specific operation means 1" in FIG. 23(J) is the first operation means (in this example, when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state) among a plurality of types of operation means. It indicates whether the slide switch SW1) provided at a position where only the switch SW1 is operable is in the ON state or the OFF state. In addition, the "specific operation means 2" is the second operation means of one of the plurality of types of operation means (in this example, it is provided at a position where it can be operated only when the front door (door body) 102 is in the open state. This indicates whether the slide switch SW2) is in the ON state or the OFF state.

In the state shown in FIG. 23(J)(3), the first specific operation means (slide switch SW1) is switched from off to on in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. 23(J)(2). An operation has been performed.

In this example, in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. Therefore, the error sound (door open) output from the sound output means (speaker) is stopped (muted), and the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is displayed. Etc. is deleted, and the simple display for the administrator (simple system settings) is displayed.

Here, the simple display is a display for setting whether or not the player has the authority to change the volume, setting the range of the volume setting value by the player, and viewing an error log, etc., which will be described later. This display has fewer items that can be set than the detailed display.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 23(J)(4), the second specific operation means (slide switch SW2) is turned from off to on in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. 23(J)(2). It is a state in which an operation to switch to is performed.

In this example, the second specific operation means (slide switch SW2) is operated (switched from OFF to ON) in the door open state and open detection state shown in FIG. Therefore, the error sound (door open) output from the sound output means (speaker) is stopped (muted), and the error display ED1 (door open) displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is displayed. Etc. is deleted, and the detailed display (detailed system settings) of the display for the administrator is displayed.

Here, the detailed display is a display for setting the time setting, power saving setting, etc., and viewing error history, countermeasures, etc., and it is a display with more items that can be set than the simple display. be.

It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to this example, and in the state where the simplified display for administrator shown in FIG. It may be configured such that when the operation (switching from off to on) is performed, it is possible to shift to the detailed display of the display for administrator shown in FIG.

Further, when the display for administrator shifts to the detailed display of the display for administrator shown in FIG. Unless otherwise specified, the configuration may be such that the transition to the simple display for the administrator shown in (J)(3) in FIG.

In addition, the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the gaming machine according to the above embodiment.

Therefore, for example, the gaming machine according to the present invention (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 148) has display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 1) and a display provided in front of the gaming machine. , a door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 1 and 148), and detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor, magnetic sensor, proximity switch, micro switch, Hall elements, etc.), sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3), and change operation means (for example, an administrator (amusement store clerk, etc.) used to change settings related to the sound output means) Back knob (rotary switch, slide switch, etc. used by ), control means (for example, main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 3) capable of executing game medium payout control based on the game result, and game medium A game machine comprising storage means (eg, storage device) capable of storing and settlement operation means (eg, settlement button 134 shown in FIG. 1), wherein the change operation means changes the door body between the closed state and the Means provided at a position operable only in the open state of the open state, and when the settlement operation means is operated, the game media stored in the storage means can be settled. The sound output means is means capable of outputting a payout sound in relation to the payout control, and the sound output means is means capable of outputting a settlement sound in relation to the settlement of the game media. The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means detects when the door body is in the open state. The detection means can change the detection state to the closed detection state even if the door body is in the open state by performing a predetermined operation related to the detection means. The door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the dispensing sound is output (for example, FIG. 16(a) (1) during the payout operation), when a first operation (for example, an operation to change the setting value for administrator from F to D) is performed on the change operation means, the payout sound being output The door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the settlement sound is output (for example, FIG. 16 (a) During the settlement operation shown in (3)), The amusement machine may be characterized in that the volume of the settlement sound being output does not change even when the first operation is performed on the change operation means.

According to the gaming machine according to the present invention, the volume of the payout sound can be adjusted during the medal payout operation, while the settlement sound volume cannot be adjusted during the medal payment operation. , fraudulent acts, etc. can be prevented.

Further, in a state in which the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the dispensing sound is output, a second operation (for example, , an operation to change the setting value for administrator from F to A) is performed, the volume of the payout sound being output is changed, and the door body is in the open state and in the state of the detection means. When the second operation is performed on the change operation means in a state where the detection state is the closing detection state and the settlement sound is being output, the volume of the settlement sound being output changes. may be configured to

Further, in a state in which the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the dispensing sound is output, the first operation ( For example, when an operation to change the setting value for administrator from F to D) is performed, the volume of the payout sound being output is lowered, and the door body is in the open state and the detection means is the closing detection state and the settlement sound is being output, even if the first operation is performed on the change operation means, the volume of the settlement sound being output does not decrease, and when the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, and the payout sound is output, the change operation means On the other hand, when the second operation is performed, the volume of the payout sound being output is reduced, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. and when the second operation is performed on the change operation means in a state where the settlement tone is being output, the volume of the settlement tone being output is reduced. good.

In addition, the game machine according to the present invention (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIGS. 1 and 18) includes a display means (for example, the effect image display device 157 shown in FIGS. 1 and 18) and a display provided in front of the game machine. A door that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIGS. 1 and 18) and detection means that can detect the open/closed state of the door (for example, an open/close sensor 103 shown in FIG. 18, a magnetic sensor, proximity switch, micro switch, Hall element, etc.), notification means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 3, various lamps 420 shown in FIG. 3, shutter 163 shown in FIG. 1, and reels 110 to 112), A game machine comprising a plurality of types of operation means including a first operation means and a second operation means, which are used to change certain settings (for example, volume setting, light intensity setting) related to the notification means, , the first operation means is a means (for example, an administrator switch MSW shown in FIG. 18, a management back knob (rotary switch, slide switch, etc.) used by a person (amusement store clerk, etc.), and the second operation means is provided at a position where it can be operated even when the door body is in the closed state. (for example, a player switch PSW shown in FIG. 18, a cross key having up, down, left, and right buttons and a determination button used by a player, a production button, a touch panel, etc.), and the detection means is the door When the body is in the closed state, the detection state is a closed detection state (for example, a state in which the detection means is detecting that it is in a closed detection state, or a signal indicating that it is in a closed detection state). The detection means is capable of entering an open detection state (for example, when the detection means is in an open detection state) when the door body is in the open state. or a state in which the detecting means outputs a signal indicating that the open state is detected to the outside), and a predetermined operation related to the detecting means. (For example, by pushing in a rod-shaped body, the light from the light projecting part of the open/close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, and the detection state is changed to the closed detection state), so that the door body is in the open state. The detection state of the detection means is configured to be the closed detection state even if there is, and the display means displays a certain setting related to the certain setting (for example, the player setting value PD shown in FIG. 18). is a means by which the The display means is means capable of displaying an error display when the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the door body is in the closed state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed state. When the door changes from the closed state to the open state in the detection state where the certain setting display is displayed, the detection state of the detection means changes to the open detection state, and the certain error display is displayed. (For example, the front door open error display ER shown in FIG. 18(2) or the front door open error display shown in FIGS. 8(a)(2)) is displayed, and the door body When the predetermined operation is performed in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the certain error display is displayed, the detection state of the detection means changes to the closed detection state. , the display of the certain error display that has been displayed is terminated (for example, the state shown in FIG. 18(3)), and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is In the closed detection state, the display of the certain setting display can be started (for example, the state shown in FIG. 18(4)), and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the In a state in which the certain setting display is displayed in the closed detection state, a certain operation (for example, the administrator setting value is changed from 2 to 4) is performed, the certain error display is not displayed (for example, the state shown in FIG. 18(5)), and the display means Means capable of displaying management setting displays, wherein the display of the management setting displays cannot be started when the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state. It may be a game machine characterized by

Further, one or more of the plurality of states described using FIGS. 19 to 23 may be combined with one or more other states, or one or more of the plurality of states may be combined with another Or by replacing with multiple states, you may be able to obtain new effects. Also, "may be displayed (started)" means that there are times when it is "displayed (started)" and times when it is "not displayed (started)" depending on conditions.

For example, if the condition is the result of a lottery, it means "displayed (started)" if the lottery is won, and "not displayed (started)" if the lottery is not won. . In addition, if the condition is a certain game state, it will be "displayed (started)" if it is a certain game state, and "not displayed (started)" if it is not a certain game state. means.

Note that the game machine according to each invention described above can also be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

In addition, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the invention described above are merely enumerations of the most preferred actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those of the implementation of the present invention. It is not limited to what is described in the form. Further, by applying the contents described in one configuration among the plurality of configurations described in any of the above-described embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

<Other embodiments>
Other embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the slot machine of the present embodiment, a plurality of reels, into which a predetermined number of game media are inserted and on which a plurality of types of symbols are respectively applied, start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the receipt of the rotation start instructing operation, the propriety of the internal winning of a plurality of types of wins is determined by a lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instructing operation, If the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop meets the predetermined payout condition, the game medium is paid out and the game is finished, and if not, the game medium is discarded. It is a game machine that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

<Overall composition>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 24 to 35 are used only for the explanation of this embodiment. 24 to 35 have priority. Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24 corresponds to an example of the gaming table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device may not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 are configured to notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the controller of the slot machine will be described. The control section of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control section that controls the progress of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") sent by the main control section that controls the main effects. and a second sub-controller for controlling various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller.

The main control section has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section and enables communication with the first sub-control section. Information communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit. It is not possible to send signals such as commands to the unit.

The first sub-controller has a basic circuit that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller based on the control commands. The first sub-controller controls sound output means (speaker, sound source IC, etc.) and various lamps.

The second sub-controller has a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-controller via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller based on this control command. The second sub-controller controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be explained.

Symbols displayed on the top of the left reel are symbols on the top left reel, symbols displayed on the middle of the left reel are symbols on the middle of the left reel, symbols displayed on the bottom of the left reel are symbols on the bottom of the left reel, and symbols displayed on the top of the middle reel. The symbol to be displayed is the middle reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle reel is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle reel is the middle reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the right reel is the top symbol Right reel top symbols, right reel middle symbols, right reel middle symbols, right reel bottom symbols, and right reel bottom symbols. There are 3 vertically on each reel, for a total of 9.

In this embodiment, one winning line is provided, which is a middle winning line composed of left reel middle symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel middle symbols. A winning line is a line set at a stop position of a symbol visible through a symbol display window, and is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine of this embodiment can bet 3 or 2, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines are activated and 3 or 2 medals are placed. Win lines are activated when bets are placed. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever.

Also, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 pay lines, which are upward-sloping pay lines, may be set as valid pay lines, or a number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 25(a) and 25(b). FIG. 3(a) shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination, and remarks. ) is a diagram showing the types of normal pressing order bells and special pressing order bells, and payouts corresponding to each pressing order.

Each of the reels 110 to 112 has a predetermined number of frames (eg, 20 frames) of a plurality of types of symbols (eg, replay symbols, watermelon symbols, cherry symbols, bell symbols, etc. shown in FIG. 25(a)). .

Winning roles of the slot machine 100 include special roles (not shown) (special role 1, special role 2), general roles (replay role, small wins 1 to 4, normal order bell, special order bell), etc. There is Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination is a combination that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands". Further, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning a special role 2 and a replay role are included.

The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combination) that shift to a special game state by winning a prize. In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in the 3-coin bet game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in the 2-coin bet game. It should be noted that no medals are paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is, for example, "seven 1-seven 1-seven 2" for special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-seven 1" for special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 1 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 2, the main control unit shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the game after the next time, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination 1 is internally won, the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win all together. This special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the game state to a special game state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 being displayed. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts (in this example, 110 for winning by BB1 and 55 for winning by BB2) are paid out, a replay low probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) there is).

A "replay combination" is a prize winning combination (operating combination) that can be played in the next game without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

“Small wins (small wins 1 to 4)” are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The hand 2 (cherry) is "cherry-ANY-ANY", etc., as shown in FIG. 25(a). The corresponding number of payouts is also shown in the figure.

The small win 1 (watermelon) and the small win 2 (cherry) are wins that can be won by operating the correct timing. This indicates that any pattern may be used for the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 . In addition, although the details will be described later, the small win 3 and the small win 4 are wins that can be won by operating the correct answer order. There is a case.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of predetermined reel stop control data is selected based on a predetermined condition (result of internal lottery processing for a winning combination), and based on the selected reel stop control data. conduct.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame sliding control) is performed. The pull-in control shifts the stop positions of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (the number of symbols) after the player operates the stop buttons 137-139. refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control unit. Each reel stop data consists of permissive control that permits the symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed together on the winning line, and prohibition control that the symbol combination of any winning combination is not displayed together on the winning line. , is roughly divided into.

Examples of the allowable control are, for example, when a winning combination is internally won, or when a special combination is internally won (while the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed in a uniform manner within the range of the number of frames, even if it is bad. However, since it is only "accepted", there are cases where the symbol combination is not complete depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137-139.

For example, when the small win 1 (watermelon) is internally won, the watermelon pattern is arranged in more than four frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon pattern will be placed on the winning line. Do not stop.

Of course, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, there are cases where the symbols are aligned 100%. For example, since the replay symbol arrangement interval corresponding to the replay combination is 4 frames at maximum, if the replay combination is internally won, 100% of the winnings are won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example of prohibition control is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the internal winning of the special role is not in progress (flag carried over), and the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139 by the player. At best, the control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Push order bell>
Next, the normal push-order bell and the special push-order bell will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 25(b).

<Normal push order bell>
When one of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, a plurality of small wins (in this example, a small win 3 and a small win 4) are won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. A symbol combination to be displayed on the winning line is determined. It should be noted that it is possible to internally win the "normal pushing order bell 1-6" even if the set value is any of the settings 1-6. It should be noted that it is also possible to combine a further small winning combination to win multiple prizes.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), each of the "normal pushing order bells 1 to 6" includes six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". , and in this example, 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to one of the six types of pushing orders. The range of the lottery data associated with each of the six types of pushing order is the same.

For example, in the case of internal winning of "normal pushing order bell 1LCR" out of "normal pushing order bell 1", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel. A stop operation for the reel 112 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stopping operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order). In addition, when "normal push order bell 4CRL" of "normal push order bell 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel. A stop operation for the reel 110 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-piece small winning combination (small winning combination 3), "Bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 "Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, if there is a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) that does not follow the 12-card acquisition navigation, "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to one small win (small win 4) will be won. Displayed on the line, one medal is paid out, or if the small winning combination 4 is missed (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), medals are paid out. It will not be done (it will be lost).

In addition, when the stop operation (correct pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning one) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), " Bell-Bell-Replay” is displayed on the pay line, and if one medal is paid out or if the small win 4 is missed (the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 4 was not displayed on the pay line case), medals will not be paid out (it will be lost).

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) is performed that does not follow the navigation for winning one, depending on the operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 will be on the winning line. , and 12 medals are paid out, or "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the 4th small win is displayed on the winning line, and 1 medal is paid out, or the 4th small win is missed. In this case (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), no medals are paid out (lost).

In the "normal pushing order bells 1 to 6" of this example, 12 small wins (small winning 3) are assigned to one of the 6 types of pushing orders, so "normal pushing order bells 1 to 6" , 12 medals will be paid out with a probability of 1/6. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be greater than 1/6.

<Privilege push order bell>
When one of the "privilege pushing order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, a plurality of small wins (in this example, a small win 3 and a small win 4) are won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. A symbol combination to be displayed on the winning line is determined. It should be noted that even if the set value is any one of the settings 1 to 6, it is possible to internally win the "privilege pushing order bell 1 to 6". It should be noted that it is also possible to combine a further small winning combination to win multiple prizes. Also, the combination of small wins may be different between the normal push-order bell and the privilege push-order bell.

As shown in FIG. 25(b), each of the "privilege order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". In this example, one small winning combination (4 small winning combinations) is assigned to one of the six types of pushing orders, and the six types of pushing orders are set. 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to 5 of them. The range of the lottery data associated with each of the six types of pushing order is the same.

For example, in the case of internal winning of "Privilege push order bell 1LCR" among "Privilege push order bell 1", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel. A stop operation for the reel 112 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order). Further, when the "privilege push order bell 4CRL" of the "privilege push order bell 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel. A stop operation for the reel 110 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct pushing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning one) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), "Bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 Bell-Replay” is displayed on the winning line, and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, if there is a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) that does not follow the navigation for acquiring one, "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to the 12-card small win (small win 3) will be awarded. displayed on the line.

Also, when the stop operation (correct order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3), the " "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) is performed that does not follow the navigation for acquiring 12 coins, "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the small win 4 is displayed on the winning line, One medal is paid out.

In this example, "Privilege push order bells 1-6", since 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to 5 out of 6 push orders, "Privilege push order bells 1-6" 12 medals will be paid out with a probability of 5/6. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be larger or smaller than 5/6. In addition, even if any one of the privilege push-order bells 1 to 6 is internally won, the payout will not be 0 due to missing. Therefore, the player can easily notice that he/she has won the privilege push-order bell.

<advantageous section, non-advantageous section>
Next, the advantageous section and the non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(a). FIG. 26(a) is a diagram schematically showing an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section of the slot machine 100. FIG.

The slot machine 100 has a non-advantageous section and an advantageous section that is more advantageous to the player than the non-advantageous section. After the power is turned on or after the setting value is changed, a non-advantageous section is set as an initial state, and when the advantageous section transition condition is satisfied in this non-advantageous section (for example, when a replay role is won in a certain game) Then, an advantageous section is set from the next game.

In addition, when the non-advantageous section transition condition is satisfied in this advantageous section (for example, when the AT state ends after shifting from the normal state to the AT state, or when the limiter is reached, etc.), the non-advantageous section from the next game An advantageous section is set, and the navigation number counter 2 is initialized to 0.

Here, the navigation number counter 2 is a counter that indicates the accumulated number of times of navigation in the advantageous section (navigation for acquiring one card executed when internally winning the privilege push-order bell), and the number of times when the advantageous section is shifted to the non-advantageous section. It is initialized to 0 when a case or RAM is cleared, and is incremented by 1 each time navigation is performed in an advantageous section. Although the details will be described later, this navigation number counter 2 is used when displaying the numerical values of the navigation number counter 2 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 .

<Types of game state>
Next, the game state and transition of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 26(b). FIG. 26(b) is a diagram showing an example of game state transition of the slot machine 100. As shown in FIG.

The slot machine 100 has game states including at least a normal state, a first chance state, a second chance state, and an AT state, in addition to the above-described advantageous interval and non-advantageous interval.

<Normal state>
The normal state is set as the initial state after the power is turned on or after the set value is changed. When the conditions for shifting to the first chance state are established in this normal state (in this example, when the navigation number counter 1 reaches 50), the game shifts to the first chance state from the next game. This state includes non-advantageous sections and advantageous sections.

Here, the navigation number counter 1 is a counter that indicates the total number of executions of the navigation of the privilege push-order bell (navigation for obtaining one card), and is used when the first chance state shifts to the normal state or when the RAM is cleared. is initialized to 0 when executing, etc. Every time navigation (navigation for winning one card) that suggests the operation order to win the special order bell and win one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is performed is incremented by 1. Although the details will be described later, this navigation frequency counter 1 is used when calculating the navigation compliance rate, when displaying numerical values of the navigation frequency counter 1 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the like.

Also, when the condition for transition to the second chance state is satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the lottery for transition to the second chance state (for example, lottery with a winning probability of 1/300) is won), the next time The game shifts to the second chance state. Also, when the conditions for shifting to the AT state are satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the navigation number counter 2 reaches 300), the game shifts to the AT state from the next game.

<First chance state>
The first chance state is a state in which it is possible to shift to the second chance state, and is more advantageous to the player than in the normal state. In this example, the first chance state is 5 games (fixed), and every game, a lottery to determine whether to shift to the second chance state (lottery for transition to the second chance state. This example Then, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/5 is performed.

In this first chance state, when the conditions for shifting to the second chance state are satisfied (in this example, when the lottery for shifting to the second state is won), the second chance state is entered from the next game. Transition. Also, when the conditions for shifting to the normal game are satisfied in the first chance state (in this example, when the lottery for transition to the second chance state is not won), the next game is shifted to the normal game. At the same time, the navigation number counter 1 is initialized to 0.

<Second Chance State>
The second chance state is a state in which an AT lottery is conducted to determine whether or not to shift to the AT state, and is more advantageous to the player than the normal state and the first chance state. In this example, the second chance state is 5 games (fixed), and every game, a lottery (AT transition lottery) to determine whether to shift to the AT state. )I do.

When the conditions for shifting to the AT state are satisfied in the second chance state (in this example, when the AT shift lottery is won), the next game is shifted to the AT state. Also, when the conditions for shifting to the normal game are established in the second chance state (in this example, when the AT shift lottery is not won), the next game is shifted to the normal game.

In this example, the configuration is such that the AT state does not transition to the second chance state, but the transition may be made possible. It is preferable that the probability is set to 1/2 regardless of the navigation adherence rate, which will be described later, and that the playability is different from the second chance state that does not go through the AT state.

<AT state>
The AT state is a state in which the AT game can be played a predetermined number of times (in this example, 30 games per set), and is more advantageous to the player than in other game states.

In this AT game, a set continuation lottery (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed to determine whether or not to continue the AT game in the starting game of the AT game. In this example, AT games (30 games per set) are given, and the AT state is extended.

When the condition for shifting to the normal game is satisfied in this AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are completed), the next game is shifted to the normal game.

It should be noted that the benefits granted to the player in the AT state are not limited to the granting of the AT game. The probability of winning the extension lottery may be increased (for example, from 10% to 20%), and the rate of entry into the special zone (extension determination period) in the AT state may be increased (for example, from 20% to 30%). ), the extension decision rate in the AT state may be increased (for example, an average of 10 games added to an average of 30 games added), and the navigation rate in the AT state may be increased (for example, from 80% to 100% up).

<Navi compliance rate>
Next, the navigation compliance rate will be described with reference to FIG.

In the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when winning the special order bell in the normal state, navigation (navigation for winning one card) is performed to suggest the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4). , 1 is added to the navigation number counter 1. Then, when the player performs an operation according to the one-card acquisition navigation, it is treated as having performed a correct operation, and 1 is added to a correct operation counter indicating the number of correct operation. , when an operation that does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation is performed, it is treated as an incorrect answer sequence operation, and 1 is not added to the correct operation counter.

In this example, during the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state, the navigation number counter 1 and the correct operation counter are updated, and the correct operation counter is divided by the navigation number counter 1. A navigation observance rate is calculated, and based on this navigation observance rate, the winning probability of the transition lottery in the first chance state and the second chance state and the winning probability of the set continuation lottery in the AT state are changed.

Further, in this example, the case where the stop operation following the navigation for obtaining one card is continued for a certain period and the case where the stop operation not following the navigation for obtaining one card is continued for a certain period are determined for a certain period of time. It is designed so that the player's profit is almost the same if the game is over a long period of time. Further, if the stop operation following the navigation for obtaining one medal is continued, the consumption of medals increases in the normal state, but it is advantageous in later games, while the stop operation not following the navigation for obtaining one medal is performed. is continued, the amount of tokens consumed is reduced during normal operation, but there is no advantage in later games.

For this reason, the player has no choice but to finish in front of the ceiling by choosing between a stop operation according to the one-card acquisition navigation and a stop operation not according to the one-card acquisition navigation according to his or her budget. , it is possible to reduce situations in which the game is finished without winning, and the player's desire to play the game is not diminished.

Note that the navigation compliance rate may be calculated by other methods. For example, the number of times the player does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation may be determined every 100 games, and if the number is 0, the number may be reset (the navigation compliance rate may be set to 100%). In this case, it may be possible to reduce the influence of other players' game histories. Further, it is also possible to simply count the number of times the player does not follow the one-card acquisition navigation, and change the winning probability according to the count value. In this case, it may be possible to reduce the processing load associated with the calculation. This also applies to other states.

In addition, the probability of winning the transition lottery in the first chance state and the second chance state and the winning probability of the set continuation lottery in the AT state are based on other numerical values instead of (or in addition to) the navigation compliance rate. For example, even if the navigation compliance rate is low, if the number of operation errors is small, the navigation compliance rate may be treated as high.

<Navi adherence rate and transition lottery (first chance state)>
FIG. 27(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in the first chance state and the winning probability of the shift lottery.

As described above, in the first chance state, if the transition lottery with a winning probability of 1/5 is won, the state will shift to the second chance state from the next game, but if the navigation compliance rate exceeds 90% increases the winning probability of the transition lottery from 1/5 to 1/3, and if the navigation compliance rate is 70-90%, increases the winning probability of the transition lottery When the adherence rate is less than 70%, it is configured to maintain the winning probability of the shift lottery.

That is, in the first chance state, if the navigation compliance rate in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state) is high, the winning probability of the transition lottery becomes higher, making it easier to transition to a second chance state.

In other words, if the privilege push-order bell is won in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player. The more the correct pushing order operation is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning one card) that suggests the operation order to win a small role (small role 4), the higher the probability of winning the transition lottery, and the second chance state. easier to do.

With such a specification, the player will perform operations according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to increase the probability of transition to the second chance state. It is possible to realize a ball payout rate and game performance in line with the intention of the player.

It should be noted that the ease of transition from the first chance state to the second chance state may be the same regardless of the navigation compliance rate. In addition, when operating according to the navigation (when the navigation compliance rate is high), it may be configured to favor matters related to the second chance state determined in the first chance state, for example, the second chance The length of the state period may be extended (resulting in easier transition to AT state), or the likelihood of winning the lottery in the second chance state may be increased (resulting in transition to AT state may be made easier).

<Navi adherence rate and transition lottery (second chance state)>
FIG. 27(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation adherence rate and the transition lottery winning probability in the second chance state.

As described above, in the second chance state, if the transition lottery with a winning probability of 1/10 is won, the state is shifted to the AT state from the next game, but if the navigation compliance rate exceeds 90%, the transition is made. Raise the winning probability of the lottery from 1/10 to 1/8, and if the navigation compliance rate is 70-90%, increase the winning probability of the migration lottery from 1/10 to 1/9, and increase the navigation compliance rate In the case of less than 70%, it is configured to maintain the winning probability of the shift lottery.

That is, in the second chance state, if the navigation compliance rate is high for a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), the winning probability of the transition lottery becomes higher, making it easier to shift to the AT state.

In other words, if the privilege push-order bell is won in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player. The more you perform the correct pushing order operation according to the navigation (navigation for winning one card) that suggests the operation order to win a small role (small role 4), the higher the probability of winning the transition lottery, and the easier it is to shift to the AT state. .

With such specifications, the player will perform operations according to the navigation in order to increase the rate of navigation compliance in order to increase the probability of transition to the AT state. It is possible to realize the pay-out rate and game performance along the line.

<Navi adherence rate and set continuation lottery (AT state)>
FIG. 27(c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the navigation compliance rate in the AT state and the winning probability of the set continuation lottery.

As described above, in the AT state, if you win the set continuation lottery with a winning probability of 1/4, you will be given an AT game of 30 games per set, and the AT state will be extended, but the navigation compliance rate will be 90%. If it exceeds, the winning probability of the set continuation lottery will be increased from 1/4 to 1/2, and if the navigation compliance rate is 70-90%, the winning probability of the set continuation lottery will be increased from 1/4 to 1/3. , and when the navigation compliance rate is less than 70%, the winning probability of the set continuation lottery is maintained.

That is, in the AT state, if the navigation compliance rate in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state) is high, the probability of winning the set continuation lottery is high. , and the AT game is likely to be given in the AT state.

In other words, if the privilege push-order bell is won in a certain period (in this example, the period from the end of the previous AT state to the start of the next AT state), one piece that is disadvantageous to the player. The AT game is more likely to be given in the AT state as the correct pushing order operation is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning one card) that suggests the operation order to win a small winning combination (small winning combination 4).

With such specifications, the player will operate according to the navigation in order to increase the rate of compliance with the navigation in order to increase the probability of continuing the set. It is possible to achieve a ball payout rate and playability.

<Various navigation>
Next, various types of navigation will be described with reference to FIG.

<Various navigation / non-AT state>
FIG. 28(a) is a diagram showing an example of various navigations in the non-AT state.

In this example, in the non-advantageous section (non-AT state), even if you win the special push order bell, the navigation (1 win navigation) and navigation (navigation for winning 12 cards) suggesting an operation order for winning a 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) are not executed.

This non-advantageous section (non-AT state) is highly likely to be stayed after the setting is changed (immediately after the amusement arcade opens) or the like, and is a period in which it is difficult to shift to the AT state immediately. That is, since it is a disadvantageous period for the player compared to the advantageous section, navigation is not performed in this non-advantageous section, so that it is easy to win 12 small wins (small win 3) (5/6 12 small wins (3 small wins) with a probability of .

On the other hand, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), if the normal pushing order bell is won, the navigation that suggests the operation order to win one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) (navigation for acquiring one pushing order) , and the navigation (navigation for winning 12 cards) that suggests the operation order to win the 12-card small role (small role 3) is not executed, but if you win the special order bell, some Except for the exception of 1, it is configured to execute navigation (navigation for winning one) that suggests an operation order for winning a small winning combination (small winning combination 4).

In this advantageous section (non-AT state), if the privilege push-order bell is won, the player is strongly urged to operate according to the one-piece acquisition navigation, so the normal push-order bell is won in the AT state. The notification mode is different from the navigation for obtaining 12 cards (for example, the navigation described later with reference to FIG. 28C).

Specifically, in the AT state, a sound effect (navigation sound) different from the navigation for obtaining 12 cards normally performed when the order bell is won in the AT state is output, and a display suggesting the operation order (RCL in this example) is displayed. By enclosing the periphery with the effect image EF, the player is strongly encouraged to perform the operation according to the navigation for acquiring one card.

In addition, there is no particular limitation on the aspect of navigation for acquiring one when winning the privilege pushing order bell in the advantageous section (non-AT state), for example, the color of the navigation image may be changed (for example, If the image of the navigation for obtaining 12 images, which is performed when the normal pressing order bell is won in the AT state, is black, it may be displayed in red). In addition, the display position of the navigation image may be changed (for example, if the position of the navigation image for acquiring 12 images performed when the normal push order bell is won in the AT state is below the display area, the display may be displayed in the center of the area). In addition, it is preferable to make it easy for the player to notice by turning on a dedicated lamp or turning off a lamp that is always on.

FIG. 28(b) is a diagram showing an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (non-AT state).

As described above, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), navigation is not performed when the normal push-order bell is won, so the execution frequency of navigation in the advantageous section (non-AT state) is lower than in the AT state. For this reason, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), players who are accustomed to operating conventional machines have a preconceived notion that this is a period in which navigation is not performed, and even if navigation is performed, inertia There is a possibility that you will perform the forward pressing operation (incorrect pressing order operation).

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 28(b), when winning a role other than the privilege push-order bell (for example, a replay role), it should be configured to perform navigation in the same way as when the privilege push-order bell is won. For example, by increasing the execution frequency of navigation and impressing the player with the execution of navigation, it is possible to reduce erroneous operations of the player and increase the satisfaction of the player. When a replay role is won, the navigation may be performed every time, or the navigation may be performed at an appropriate number of times (for example, about once every three times). In addition, even if navigation is performed when winning the replay role, the navigation at the time of winning this replay role is irrelevant to the navigation compliance rate, and the navigation is more important than when winning the bonus order bell. Since the degree is low, the effect image EF for calling attention may be configured not to be displayed.

In addition, if it is configured so that navigation is performed even when the winning role is not won (in the case of a loss) in the same way as when winning the privilege order bell, the execution frequency of navigation is increased, and the execution of navigation is increased. By impressing the player, it is possible to reduce erroneous operations of the player and increase the degree of satisfaction of the player. It should be noted that navigation may be performed each time in the case of a loss, or may be performed at an appropriate number of times (for example, about once every five times).

<Various navigation / advantageous section (AT state)>
FIG. 28(c) is a diagram showing an example of various navigations in an advantageous section (AT state).

In the advantageous section (AT state), if you win the normal pushing order bell, with some exceptions, navigation that suggests the operation order to win 12 small wins (small win 3) (navigation for winning 12 coins ) is configured to run.

Although illustration is omitted, when the player performs an operation according to the 12 medal acquisition navigation, when paying out 12 medals, a sound effect (payout sound) is output and 12 medals are paid out. A display indicating that the game has been performed (for example, a display including a character string "get 12 cards") is displayed.

Also, in the advantageous section (AT state), even if you win the special push order bell, with some exceptions, in the same manner as when you win the normal push order bell, 12 small wins (small win 3) It is configured to execute navigation (navigation for winning 12 cards) that suggests an operation sequence for winning a prize.

In addition, even if you perform an incorrect answer pushing order operation due to an operation error etc. and win a prize of 12 small wins (small win 3), in the same manner as when the correct answer pushing order operation is performed, the sound effect (payout sound ) is output, and a display indicating that 12 coins have been paid out (for example, a display including a character string “Get 12 coins”) is performed. Since the AT state is a state in which a large number of medals are given to the player, even if the player has performed the wrong answer pressing order operation, if the player has obtained 12 medals, the correct answer pressing order is given. By executing the same effect as the operation, it is possible to prevent the player's interest from decreasing in the AT state.

In this example, if you win the privilege push order bell (for example, privilege push order bell 1), 12 pieces acquisition navigation (for example, one of the five push orders excluding the LCR push order) 1), but when selecting one of a plurality of types of 12-card acquisition navigators, if the navigator is selected by lottery, the order of pressing will be biased. fairness can be ensured.

Further, when selecting one of a plurality of types of navigation for obtaining 12 cards, a predetermined navigation may be executed. If the navigation (predetermined navigation) to be executed when the bell 2 is won is executed, it is possible to reduce the control load related to the determination of the pressing order.

In addition, during the AT game, navigation that reduces the operating conditions (for example, navigation that reduces the number of options in the order of pressing, navigation that lowers the difficulty of operation by widening the pressing range, etc.) may be executed. , For example, when the privilege pushing order bell 1 wins other than the AT game, while executing the so-called 6-choice pushing order navigation that specifies the order of LCR, when the privilege pushing order bell 1 wins in the AT game, "first If the so-called 3-option pressing order navigating specifying "stop the middle reel immediately" is executed, the player can easily perform the operation during the AT game, and the player's satisfaction can be enhanced.

In addition, if one, a plurality, or all of the processes such as the process of executing predetermined navigation and the process of executing navigation with fewer operation conditions during AT games are applied, it is possible to determine the pushing order. While reducing the related control load, it is possible to reduce the player's operation errors during the AT game and increase the player's satisfaction.

<Navigation frequency counter>
Next, the navigation number counter will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 29 is a diagram showing a display example of the navigation number counter.

The state shown in FIG. 1(i) is the state in which the navigation display is started. The display of the navigation prompting the operation and the effect image EF has started.

In the same state, the current value of the navigation frequency counter 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1 provided in the upper right of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the counter 2 is provided below the counter 1 display area CT1. The current value of the navigation number counter 2 is displayed in the display area CT2.

The numerical value of the counter 1 and the numerical value of the counter 2 are the displayed numerical values that match the internally stored numerical values. For example, immediately after the power is turned on, both the numerical value of the counter 1 and the numerical value of the counter 2 are displayed as 0, which may not match the internally stored numerical value.

As described above, the number-of-navigation counter 1 is a counter indicating the total number of executions of the navigation of the privilege push-order bell. , a numerical value of 1 is displayed. Further, the navigation number counter 2 is a counter that indicates the accumulated number of times of navigation in an advantageous section. ing.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 2(ii) is a state in which the first stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 139) is performed with the first stop reel being the right reel 112. In this example, the first stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation that prompts the first stop operation (right) (in this example, the image where 1 is circled) is deleted and the navigation that prompts the second stop operation (middle) (in this example, 2 is circled) image) is enlarged.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 3(iii) is a state in which a second stop operation (an operation of pressing the stop button 138) is performed with the second stop reel being the middle reel 111. In this example, the second stop operation is performed. Since it was accepted, the navigation that prompts the second stop operation (middle) (in this example, the image where 2 is circled) is deleted and the navigation that prompts the third stop operation (left) (in this example, 3 is circled) image) is enlarged.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 4(iv) is a state in which a third stop operation (an operation of pressing the stop button 137) has been performed with the left reel 110 as the third stop reel. Since it has been accepted, the navigation prompting the third stop operation (left) (in this example, the image where 3 is circled) and the effect image EF are deleted.

In addition, in the same state, since one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is won, a payout process of paying out one medal is executed, and a display suggesting the payout of medals (in this example, one payout display including a string of "+1" suggesting ). In this example, the number of medals to be paid out is one, and the number of medals to be paid out in the game is reduced. is configured not to output a payout sound (sound effect). With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling discomfort or discomfort.

In addition, by the payout process of paying out one medal, it is determined that the player has performed the correct operation according to the navigation, and that the player has won a small winning combination (small winning combination 4) by the correct operating operation. A suggestive display (in this example, a display containing the string "success") is started.

The subsequent state shown in (v) of the same figure is the state after the payout of medals has been completed. 4) The display (success) that suggests winning is deleted.

In addition, since the total number of executions of the navigation of the privilege push-order bell (navigation number counter 1) is incremented by one in the game, a numerical value of 2 (=1+1) is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1. Note that the value of the navigation number counter 1 displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1 is incremented by one even when an operation other than the correct order operation is performed due to an operation error or the like. can be prevented from decreasing more than necessary.

In addition, since the cumulative number of times of navigation in the advantageous section (navigation number counter 2) has been incremented by one in the game, the counter 2 display area CT2 value of 15 (=14+1) is displayed. In addition, the value of the navigation number counter 2 displayed in the counter 2 display area CT2 is incremented by 1 even when winning a prize combination other than the special order bell (for example, based on the winning of the replay combination) Therefore, it is possible to increase the update frequency of the display of the navigation number counter 2, and the player can proceed with the game at a good tempo while appropriately enhancing the performance effect.

<Navi execution period>
Next, the navigation execution period will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30(a) is a diagram showing an example of a navigation execution period and a non-execution period.

As described with reference to FIG. 28(a), in the advantageous section (non-AT state), if the normal pushing order bell is won, the operation order of winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) is suggested. It is configured so that neither navigation (navigation for acquiring 1 card) nor navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests an operation order for winning a 12-card small win (3 small wins) is executed, A period T2b shown in FIG. 30(a) indicates a period during which navigation is not performed.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section (non-AT state), if you win the privilege pushing order bell, with some exceptions, the navigation (1 The period T1a shown in FIG. 30(a) indicates the period during which the one-card acquisition navigation is executed.

It should be noted that the state in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed, that is, in this example, when the condition for transition to the AT state is satisfied in the second chance state (in this example, when the AT transition lottery is won), or When the condition for shifting to the AT state is satisfied in the normal state (in this example, when the navigation number counter 2 reaches 300), even if the privilege push order bell is won, the navigation for obtaining one is not executed, and a period T1b shown in FIG. 30(a) indicates a period during which navigation for obtaining one card is not executed (a period during which AT determination is notified).

In this period T1b (the period during which AT confirmation is announced), as shown in FIG. (Display of moving image regarding AT determination) is performed, but navigation for obtaining one card is not performed.

During the period T1b (the period during which the AT determination is announced), the AT game has not started, but since reducing the number of balls paid out leads to the disadvantage of the player, navigation for acquiring one is not executed, and the number of 12 To make it easier to win a prize in a piece role (small role 3). With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction without giving the player an excessive disadvantage.

In addition, depending on the skill of the player, there is a possibility that the 1-card role (small role 4) will win more than the 12-card role (small role 3) During this period, the number of medals to be paid out will be reduced a lot). It may be configured to perform navigation (navigation for winning 12 coins) suggesting an operation order for winning a small win (small win 3).

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the sense of unfairness among the players and increase the level of satisfaction of the players. In the meantime, when winning the normal push-order bell, navigation (12-card winning navigation) that suggests an operation order to win a 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) may be executed, and it is determined that the number of payouts is small. In this case, the possibility of increasing the payout number at an early stage can be increased.

Also, as described with reference to FIG. 28(c), in the advantageous section (AT state), except for some exceptions, when winning the normal pushing order bell, 12 small winnings (small winning 3) It is configured to execute the navigation (navigation for winning 12 cards) that suggests the order of operations for winning a prize, and the period T2a shown in FIG. .

In addition, in the advantageous section (AT state), with some exceptions, even if you win the special order bell, the navigation (12 win The period T1c and the period T1e shown in FIG. 30(a) indicate the periods during which the 12-card acquisition navigation is executed.

In the period T1c, as shown in FIG. 4(c), an AT-in-time notification (in this example, displaying a moving image regarding the AT state) is performed to notify that the player is in the AT state, while navigation for acquiring 12 images is executed. It is configured to With such a configuration, it is possible to further increase the player's willingness to play during the AT.

Similarly, in the period T1e, as shown in FIG. 4(e), an ending notification (in this example, a moving image related to the ending) is performed to notify that it is the ending period of the AT, while 12 images are acquired. It is configured to run navigation. With such a configuration, even in the ending period when the AT state is about to end, the player can proceed with the game in a good mood, and the player's desire to play can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in a certain period in the advantageous section (AT state) (in this example, the period of continuous judgment of AT), even if the normal pushing order bell is won or the specific pushing order bell is won, It is configured not to execute the navigation (navigation for winning 12 coins) suggesting the operation order for winning the 12 coins small win (small win 3). It shows the period during which the card acquisition navigation is not executed.

In the period T1d, as shown in FIG. 10(d), an AT continuation judge effect (in this example, a video display regarding the presence or absence of an AT set continuation) that informs that the AT is being judged continuously. It is configured not to execute 12-card acquisition navigator while performing an effect showing whether or not to execute it by the conclusion (victory or defeat) of the battle effect). With such a configuration, the navigation display does not hinder the visibility of the AT continuation judge effect, and the player can fully enjoy the effect.

It should be noted that, depending on the skill of the player, there is a possibility that the 1-card hand (small hand 4) will win more than the 12-hand hand (small hand 3), so during this period, the number of medals to be paid out will be managed. When it is judged that the number of payouts is small after processing, navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 coins) that suggests an operation order for winning a 12-coin small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is performed when winning the special push-order bell. It may be configured as

With such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the sense of unfairness among the players and increase the level of satisfaction of the players. In the meantime, when winning the normal push-order bell, navigation (12-card winning navigation) that suggests an operation order to win a 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) may be executed, and it is determined that the number of payouts is small. In this case, the possibility of increasing the payout number at an early stage can be increased.

<Modification>
Next, modified examples of the gaming machine according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 to 35. FIG.

<Mode in normal game>
FIG. 31(a) is a diagram showing an example of modes in the normal state and count values of the navigation number counter 2 corresponding to each mode, and FIG. It is a figure showing an example of a value.

In this example, three modes of modes 1 to 3 are provided in the normal game. When the condition for shifting to the normal game is satisfied in the AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are completed), the lottery data shown in FIG. One of modes 1 to 3 is selected by lottery based on , and when the normal state is shifted, the mode selected by lottery is selected.

Here, mode 1 is a mode in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the counter value of the navigation number counter 2 reaches 500 in the normal state. Mode 2 is a mode in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the counter value of the number-of-navigation counter 2 reaches 400 in the normal state. Mode 3 is a mode in which the transition to the AT state is confirmed when the count value of the navigation number counter 2 reaches 300 in the normal state.

For example, if the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state exceeds 90%, select mode 1 with a probability of 50/100, select mode 2 with a probability of 30/100, and select mode 2 with a probability of 20/100. Choose mode 3 with probability.

Also, if the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state is in the range of 70% to 90%, select mode 1 with a probability of 70/100, select mode 2 with a probability of 20/100, and select mode 2 with a probability of 10/100. Select mode 3 with a probability of 100.

Also, if the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state is less than 70%, select mode 1 with a probability of 90/100, select mode 2 with a probability of 5/100, and select mode 2 with a probability of 5/100. Select Mode 3.

That is, in this example, the higher the navigation compliance rate at the end of the AT state, the more likely it is that a mode (mode 3 in this example) that facilitates transition to the AT state will be selected. With such a configuration, the player performs an operation according to the navigation in order to increase the navigation compliance rate in order to facilitate the transition to the AT state. It is possible to achieve a higher ball payout rate and game playability.

<Modified example of display of navigation frequency counter>
FIG. 32 is a diagram showing a modification of the display of the navigation number counter.

In the above embodiment, even if an operation other than the correct operation order is performed due to an operation error, etc., 1 is added to the navigation number counters 1 and 2, and the value after the addition is displayed. In this example, the navigation number counters 1 and 2 are not incremented by 1 when an operation other than the correct operation is performed due to an operation error or the like. The numerical values of the navigation counters 1 and 2 are displayed as numerical values that match internally stored numerical values.

Specifically, the state shown in FIG. 1(i) is the state in which the display of the navigation system has started. The display of the navigation prompting the operation in order (LCR) and the effect image EF is started.

In addition, in the same state, since the total number of executions of the navigation of the privilege push order bell at the start of the game is 1, the numerical value 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1, and the navigation in the advantageous section at the start of the game is displayed. is 14, the numerical value 14 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT2.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 2(ii) is a state in which the first stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 137) is performed by an operation other than the correct pressing order operation. 3) and one small winning combination (small winning combination 4) were not won, so the navigation and the effect image EF are erased, and the payout process allows the player to perform operations other than the correct pressing order without following the navigation. is determined to have been performed, and a display (in this example, a display including a character string of "failure") indicating that it is a failure is started.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 3(iii) is the state after the winning determination, in which the display (failure) suggesting the loss is erased.

Also, in the game, operations other than the correct order operation are performed, and the total number of navigation executions of the privilege order bell (navigation number counter 1) is not incremented, so a numerical value of 1 is displayed in the counter 1 display area CT1. However, since the accumulated number of times of navigation in the advantageous section (navigation number counter 2) is not added, 14 is displayed in the counter 2 display area CT2.

In the above embodiment, when the player performs the operation according to the navigation for obtaining 12 medals, a sound effect (payout sound) is output when 12 medals are paid out. In this example, since an operation other than the correct operation order (operation not recommended) was performed, even if one win (small win 4) is won, the effect sound (payment sound) is not output. Configure.

In this example, as a result of performing an operation other than the correct order operation, it is possible to reduce the number of balls released. It is not necessary to perform the process of changing the set continuation probability. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the control burden on the gaming machine. It should be noted that if the game state is changed according to the numerical values of the navigation counters 1 and 2, it is possible to make the game less susceptible to the operation errors of other players.

<Modified example of navigation execution period>
FIG. 33 is a diagram showing a modification of the navigation execution period.

In the above embodiment, in the advantageous section (AT state), except for some exceptions, if you win the normal push order bell, the navigation for 12 acquisition is executed, and even if you win the privilege push order bell , an example of executing navigation for obtaining 12 coins is shown, but as shown in FIG. It may be configured such that the navigation for obtaining 12 cards is executed 100% even when the privilege order bell is won in the period T1c1.

Further, as shown in FIG. 2(ii), in the advantageous section (AT state), if the normal pushing order bell is won in the period T2a2, the navigation for obtaining 12 cards is executed 100%, and the privilege pushing is performed in the period T1c2. When the order bell is won, the navigation (for example, displaying "?-1-?" in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157) for notifying only the first stop operation of the correct operation order is executed 100%. It may be configured as

With such a configuration, the probability of winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is reduced from 5/6 to 1/2, so that the difficulty of winning can be increased, and the correct operation order can be guessed. It is possible to give a character and improve the playability. In this case, there is a possibility that the first stop operation is performed on a stop button other than the stop button of the middle reel.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3(iii), in the advantageous section (AT state), if the normal pushing order bell is won in the period T2a3, the navigation for obtaining 12 cards is executed 100%, and the privilege pushing is performed in the period T1c3. It may be configured so that the navigation for obtaining 12 cards is not executed when the winning order is won.

With such a configuration, the probability of winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is 5/6. Since the navigation display does not impede the visibility of the performance (for example, the ending performance) during the AT state, the player can fully enjoy the performance.

<Variation of Navi>
FIG. 34 is a diagram showing a modification of navigation.

In the above embodiment, an example is shown in which a game with a small number of balls is played by executing navigation for acquiring one in an advantageous section (non-AT state), but as in this example, a small win 1 (watermelon) may be constructed so as to perform navigation so as not to win the small winning combination 1 (watermelon).

Specifically, the state shown in FIG. 1(i) is a state in which the navigation display is started, and in this example, based on the winning of the small winning combination 1 (watermelon), it corresponds to the small winning combination 1 (watermelon). Navigation (in this example, the character string "Caution") that prompts you to stop the symbol combination (in this example, "watermelon - watermelon - watermelon") so that it does not appear on the winning line (watermelon is missing) ) and the effect image EF are started.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 2(ii) is a state in which the third stop operation (pressing operation of the stop button 139) has been performed with the right reel 112 as the third stop reel. Since it was accepted, the navigation and the effect image EF that encourages the watermelon to be dropped are deleted.

Also, in the payout process, it is determined that the player has performed a stop operation following the navigation so as to miss the small win 1 (watermelon), and a display (in this example, "success") suggests that the player has missed the watermelon. ) is started.

With such a configuration, by controlling the display of the navigation, it is possible to play a game with a small number of balls, and it is possible to realize the ball-out rate and game performance in line with the intention of the designer of the game machine. It becomes possible.

The same navigation may be performed for the small winning combination 2 (cherry), which is the missing combination, or the same navigation may be carried out for both the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) and the small winning combination 2 (cherry). In addition, since both the small winning combination 1 (watermelon) and the small winning combination 2 (cherry) can be operated to miss even without the navigation prompting the missing, the game property may be such that navigation is not performed. By executing a predetermined specific operation mode every game even without the navigation prompting the game to be missed, if the game characteristic becomes such that more failures can occur than when the specific operation mode is not executed every game, then this specification It is possible to change the advantage by using the result of directly or indirectly determining that the operation mode of is executed. Since it is not necessary to change the operation mode for each game, it is possible to provide a game property in which operation errors are less likely to occur. Furthermore, by setting the internal winning probability of a winning combination that can be won when a specific operation mode is performed to be lower than the internal winning probability of a winning combination that can be won when another operation mode is performed, a specific operation mode can be achieved. By executing each game, the frequency of winning can be reduced as compared with the case where the specific operation mode is not executed for each game.

<Modified example of AT state>
FIG. 35(a) is a diagram showing a modification of the AT state, and FIG. 35(b) is a diagram showing an example of an AT end screen displayed during the AT extension period.

In the above embodiment, the AT state is 1 set of 30 games. It may be configured to extend the AT state by increasing the number of games in the AT state according to the order miss.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 4(a), in one set (30 games), there are X times of pushing order errors (operations other than the correct pushing order operation of the 12-card hand), and the 12-card hand is not performed. The AT state may be extended until the 12-card hand wins X times when the hand is missed.

If the AT state is extended until the 12-card combination is won by the number of pushing order errors (in this example, X times), there is a possibility that the profit given to the player will be excessive due to the winning of other winning combinations. Therefore, the AT state may be extended until a 12-card combination is won by a number less than the number of pushing order errors (X times in this example).

Further, when the AT state is extended, the display that was displayed at the end of one set (30 games) (for example, the AT end screen shown in FIG. 4B) continues to be displayed. Since the extension period of the AT state is uncertain and the occurrence frequency of extension is low, a special display for extension is not prepared. In order to clarify the total number of medals to be paid out, the total number of medals to be paid out may be displayed on the AT end screen.

In the advantageous section (non-AT state), it is possible to increase the number of payouts by performing an operation that does not follow the navigation for acquiring one, so the player who notices this can There is a possibility of performing operations that do not follow the navigation. Therefore, as in this example, if the AT state is extended until the 12-card combination is won by the number of pushing order errors, the player's profit can be secured in the extended ATT state. The player's satisfaction can be enhanced.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel 110 shown in FIG. 112), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, respectively internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to one or more wins or losses (e.g., winning combination internal lottery processing); Based on the lottery result derived by the lottery means, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) that performs stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed, and the stop control means Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the plurality of stopped reels, and operation information for reporting operation information (for example, operation navigation) in the AT state. A gaming machine comprising notifying means and game control means (for example, processing for transitioning the game state) that controls the progress of the game and can change the degree of advantage, wherein the game control means is the first One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state (for example, AT state) different from the first game state, and the first game state The first game state is terminated and the second game state is set based on the fact that a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, winning the AT transition lottery) while the game state is being set. When the internal lottery means derives a specific lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6) in the first game state, the stop operation of the stop button is the first When the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the second operation condition than the first operation (for example, stop operation of RCL) according to the operation condition, the game A large amount of value (for example, medals) can be acquired, and the game control means controls the stop operation of the stop button when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state. The lower the number of times the second operation is performed, the higher the advantage of the second game state. It is a game machine characterized by being in a state.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media.

It should be noted that ``the more the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the lower the advantage in the second game state is changed'' means ``the stop of the stop button The advantage degree related to the second game state is "always" changed to a lower advantage degree as the number of times the operation is performed in the second operation increases." The greater the number of times the stop operation is performed in the second operation, the more the advantage degree related to the second game state is changed to a lower advantage degree. The same applies to the game table).

Therefore, for example, the second operation may be performed 3 times and 4 times, and the advantage level related to the second game state may be set to the same advantage level. As a result, the second game state may be set to an advantage that is higher than the third game state due to other factors (for example, lottery etc.). Even if the number of times the second operation is performed is 0 (for example, operation error is 0), there may be a case where the advantage regarding the second game state does not change.

In addition, the "specific lottery result" according to the present invention is not limited to a single lottery result (for example, privilege push order bell 1), but one of a plurality of lottery results (for example, privilege push order bell 1 6) may be (the same applies to the gaming machines described later).

Therefore, for example, when a small winning combination X, a small winning combination Y, and a small winning combination Z are selected as a specific small winning combination group, and a small winning combination X, a small winning combination Y, or a small winning combination Z is internally won, the specific small winning combination group is internally won. (the "specific lottery result" according to the present invention is derived), the small winning combination X is a winning combination when the left reel is the first stop reel, and the small winning combination Y is the middle reel being the first stop reel. The small winning combination Y is a winning combination when the right reel is the first stopping reel, and the small winning combination X is compared to the small winning combination Y and the small winning combination Z. , is a combination with a low internal winning probability, and the small combination X, the small combination Y, and the small combination Z may have the same number of medals (for example, 8) to be paid out when winning.

With such a configuration, when the game with the left reel as the first stop reel (the game in which the first operation is performed) is continued, the number of medals that the player can obtain is reduced, and the middle reel or the right reel is reduced. is the first stop reel (a game in which the second operation is performed), the number of medals that the player can obtain increases, but if the left reel is the first stop reel and the game is continued In addition, games such as AT games can be advantageously changed.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and is driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; game value imparting means for imparting game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, medal payout processing); operation information reporting means for reporting operation information in the AT state; and controlling progress of the game. , game control means capable of changing the degree of advantage (for example, processing for transitioning the game state), wherein the state before the AT state includes a normal state and a chance state. , The chance state is a state in which it is easier to shift to the AT state than the normal state, and the game control means is a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least two game states (for example, a second chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. (For example, winning the AT transition lottery) is a means capable of terminating the first game state and setting the second game state, and in the first game state, the When a specific lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the RCL stop operation). ) in accordance with the second operation condition (for example, a stop operation such as LCR) can acquire more game value (for example, medals), and the game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the smaller the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation, the The game machine is characterized in that the second game state is the chance state, wherein the second game state is the chance state.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, the advantage of the chance state is increased by performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and is driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; game value imparting means for imparting game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, medal payout processing); operation information reporting means for reporting operation information in the AT state; and controlling progress of the game. , game control means capable of changing the degree of advantage (for example, processing for transitioning the game state), wherein the state before the AT state includes a normal state and a chance state. The chance state includes a first chance state and a second chance state, the second chance state is a state in which transition to the AT state is easier than the normal state, and the first chance state. is a state in which the higher the advantage, the easier it is to shift to the second chance state, and the game control means is different from the first game state (for example, normal state) and the first game state One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state (for example, a first chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first game state is set. Means capable of ending the first game state and setting the second game state based on that (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and in the first game state Based on the player's operation result of the stop button when a specific lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the predetermined condition is set after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Means capable of changing the degree of advantage relating to the second game state, wherein the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state. In this case, the stop operation of the stop button is performed according to the second operation condition (for example, LCR etc.) rather than the first operation (for example, RCL stop operation) according to the first operation condition. stop operation), the game value (for example, medals) can be obtained more, and the game control means determines the specific lottery result by the internal lottery means in the first game state is derived, the lower the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the higher the advantage in the second game state. , wherein the second game state is a state for shifting to the first chance state.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, the first operation to stop the stop button is more advantageous in terms of the state for shifting to the chance state. , it is possible to prompt the player to perform the first operation in the first game state, and to appropriately control the provision of game values such as the payout of game media.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and is driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; game value imparting means for imparting game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, medal payout processing); operation information reporting means for reporting operation information in the AT state; and controlling progress of the game. , game control means capable of changing the degree of advantage (for example, a process for transitioning the game state), and a game machine, wherein the game control means is a first game state (for example, normal state) and the It is possible to set one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a second game state (for example, AT state) different from the first game state, and a predetermined state in which the first game state is set is satisfied (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), the first game state can be terminated and the second game state can be set; When a specific lottery result (for example, a privilege push order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in one game state, the stop operation of the stop button is the first operation according to the first operation condition ( For example, the game value (for example, medals) can be obtained more when performing the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) according to the second operation condition than the RCL stop operation). and the game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation is Means for changing the advantage associated with the second game state to a lower advantage as the number increases, the second game state is an AT state, and the first game state is changed to the AT state. (For example, modes 1 to 3 shown in FIGS. 31(a) and (b)) are included, and the game control means controls the stop operation of the stop button to the second The lower the number of times the second operation is performed (for example, the higher the navigation compliance rate), the more advantageous the transition to the AT state may be changed from the mode in the first game state. It is a game machine characterized by being a means.

According to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, if the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation, the advantage of the second advantageous state increases, so the first In this game state, the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the giving of game values such as the payout of game media. In addition, when a specific lottery result is derived, performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation makes it easier to shift to the AT state. It is possible to prompt an operation, and to appropriately control the giving of game values such as the payout of game media.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, it is possible to execute a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation. good too.

With such a configuration, it is possible to impress the player with the first operation by issuing a notification prompting the first operation in the first game state.

In addition, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second game state, a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation (for example, 12 wins) navigation) may be executable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to impress the player that the second operation is advantageous by performing a notification to prompt the player to perform the second operation with a high profit for the player in the second game state. Along with, a player benefit can be granted,
Further, in the game in which the notification is performed, a count value indicating the number of times the notification is performed may be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually grasp the number of execution times of the notification, and the player's desire to operate can be improved.

In addition, the specific lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, normal order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, privilege order bell) different from the first lottery result. , when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived more than when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, the game value can be obtained more when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, and the second game value can be obtained by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When the result of the lottery is derived, it may be possible to execute a notification to perform the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the second operation that does not comply with the notification, the player can obtain a profit. can be resolved.

<Navigation count>
In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and is driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means for imparting game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels (for example, medal payout processing), game control means for controlling the progress of the game (for example, processing for changing the game state), , wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example, AT state, second One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least a chance state, a first chance state), and a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first game state is set (for example, Winning the AT transition lottery) is a means that can end the first game state and set the second game state, and the second game state is the first game state. It is a state more advantageous to the player than the game state, and when a specific lottery result (for example, a privilege push-order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the stop button is operated to stop. is performed under the second operating condition (e.g., stop operation of LCR, etc.) rather than the first operation (e.g., stopping operation of RCL) under the first operating condition. However, when a large amount of game value (for example, medals) can be obtained and the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation The greater the number, the greater the number of games played until the predetermined condition is satisfied, and when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, it is updated when the first operation is performed. Ru cow This gaming machine is characterized in that it can display a point value (for example, numerical values of navigation number counters 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 29).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, since the count value updated when a specific lottery result is derived is displayed, the lottery result can be grasped, and the player's desire to play can be maintained.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation (for example, navigation for acquiring 1 card, navigation for acquiring 12 cards, etc.) navigation) may be executable.

With such a configuration, the stop operation can be notified, and the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

Further, the certain count value may be a count value indicating the number of times the stop operation is performed according to the notification in the game in which the notification is executed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually grasp the number of execution times of the notification, and the player's desire to operate can be improved.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and is driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) that imparts game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels, and game control means (for example, game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the degree of advantage ), wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example , AT state, second chance state, first chance state), one game state can be set from among a plurality of game states including at least one state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied when the first game state is set. Means capable of ending the first game state and setting the second game state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and the first game state, when the internal lottery means derives a specific lottery result (e.g., privilege push-order bell 6), the player performs the stop operation of the stop button in accordance with the first operation condition ( For example, the game value (for example, medals) can be obtained more when performing the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) according to the second operation condition than the RCL stop operation). and the game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the number of times the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation is The lower the number, the more the advantage associated with the second gaming state may be changed to a higher advantage. It is possible to execute notification (for example, navigation for obtaining 1 card, navigation for obtaining 12 cards) for causing the stop operation of the tongue to be performed by the first operation or the second operation, and in the game in which the notification is performed , a certain count value to be updated (for example, the numerical value of the number-of-navigation counter 2 shown in FIG. 29).

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, since a count value indicating the number of times of execution of notification is displayed, the number of times of execution of notification can be visually grasped, and the player's willingness to operate can be improved.

Further, the game control means may be means for changing the degree of advantage in the game to a higher degree of advantage as the certain count value increases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation according to the navigation, and to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media.

In addition, the specific lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, normal order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, privilege order bell) different from the first lottery result. , when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived more than when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, the game value can be obtained more when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, and at least the first game value can be obtained by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When a second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the second operation that does not comply with the notification, the player can obtain a profit. can be resolved.

<Navigation non-execution period>
In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and is driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) that imparts game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels, and game control means (for example, game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the degree of advantage ), wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example , AT state, second chance state, first chance state), one game state can be set from among a plurality of game states including at least one state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied when the first game state is set. Means capable of ending the first game state and setting the second game state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and the first game state, when the internal lottery means derives a specific lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6), the stop operation of the stop button is set to the first operation (for example, RCL A second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) according to the second operation condition than the stop operation) can acquire more game value (for example, medals), The game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the smaller the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation, It is a means that may change the degree of advantage related to the second game state to a high degree of advantage, and the game control means controls the specific period in the first game state (for example, in FIG. 28 (a) When the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation in the non-advantageous section shown), it is a means that does not include it in the number of times that the advantage degree related to the second game state is changed. It is a playground to play.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, since there is a period during which the advantage is not changed, the game can be sharpened, and the player's desire to play can be maintained.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and is driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) that imparts game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels, and game control means (for example, game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the degree of advantage ), wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example , AT state, second chance state, first chance state), one game state can be set from among a plurality of game states including at least one state, and a predetermined condition is satisfied when the first game state is set. It is possible to end the first game state and set the second game state based on the satisfaction (for example, winning the AT transition lottery), and in the first game state, the When a specific lottery result (for example, the privilege push order bell 6) is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the RCL stop operation). ) in accordance with the second operation condition (for example, a stop operation such as LCR) can acquire more game value (for example, medals), and the game control means, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first gaming state, the second The game control means is means for changing the advantage related to the game state to a high advantage, and the game control means stops the stop button during a specific period in the first game state When the second operation is performed, it is a means that does not include the number of times the advantage degree related to the second game state is changed, and the specific period is a specific effect (for example, FIG. 30(b) The game machine is characterized in that it is a period during which the AT confirmation effect shown in ) is being executed.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, since there is a period during which the advantage is not changed, the game can be sharpened, and the player's desire to play can be maintained.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and is driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) that imparts game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels, and game control means (for example, , a game state transition process), wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state It is possible to set one game state from a plurality of game states including at least states (for example, AT state, second chance state, first chance state), and in the first game state, a specific game state is selected by the internal lottery means. When the lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is performed according to the first operation condition (for example, the RCL stop operation) rather than the second operation. The game value (for example, medals) can be obtained more when the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the operation condition, and the game control means controls the first operation. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the game state of (1), the fewer times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the more advantageous the second game state The game control means is a means that may change the degree to a high advantage, and the game control means is a specific period in the second game state (for example, the period T1d shown in FIG. 30 (a). Continuous judgment period of AT state) In the above, when the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the second operation, it is not included in the number of times the advantage degree related to the second game state is changed. It is a game machine characterized by:

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, since there is a period during which the advantage is not changed, the game can be sharpened, and the player's desire to play can be maintained.

Further, when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second game state, it is possible to execute a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. , the notification may not be executed during a certain period in the second game state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to add sharpness to the game, and to keep the player's desire to play.

Also, the specific period may be a period in which the game value given to the player changes less than a period other than the specific period.

With such a configuration, it is possible to add sharpness to the game and increase the variation of the game.

Further, when the total amount of the game value awarded in the specific period falls below a certain amount, the stop operation of the stop button is performed when the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means. It may be possible to execute notification for performing the second operation.

With such a configuration, it is possible to avoid giving a disadvantage to the player and increase the satisfaction of the player.

In addition, the specific lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, normal order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, privilege order bell) different from the first lottery result. , when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived more than when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, the game value can be obtained more, and at least the first game value can be obtained by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When a second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the second operation that does not comply with the notification, the player can obtain a profit. can be resolved.

<Navigation when winning other prizes>
In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and is driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) that imparts game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels, and game control means (for example, game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the degree of advantage ), wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example , AT state, second chance state, and first chance state), and in the first game state, the internal lottery means selects a specific game state. When the lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is performed according to the first operation condition (for example, the RCL stop operation) rather than the second operation. The game value (for example, medals) can be obtained more when the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed according to the operation condition, and the game control means controls the first operation. When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the game state of (1), the fewer times the stop operation of the stop button is performed in the second operation, the more advantageous the second game state When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the stop operation of the stop button is changed to the first game state. It is possible to execute the first notification (for example, navigation for acquiring one with effect image EF shown in FIG. 28(b)) to be performed by operation, and the first game state and even if a lottery result different from the specific lottery result (e.g., replay combination, losing) is derived by the internal lottery means, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation. A second notification (for example, acquisition navigation for one image without effect image EF shown in FIG. 28(b)) can be executed, and the second notification and the first notification are at least part of the aspect are the same.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, even when a lottery result different from a specific lottery result is derived, it is notified, so that the player can play the game at a good tempo.

Further, in the game in which the first notification is performed, a count value indicating the number of times the first notification is performed may be displayed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually grasp the number of execution times of the notification, and the player's desire to operate can be improved.

Further, the game control means may be means for changing the degree of advantage in the game to a higher degree of advantage as the count value increases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prompt the player to perform an operation according to the navigation, and to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media.

In addition, the specific lottery results include a first lottery result (for example, normal order bell) and a second lottery result (for example, privilege order bell) different from the first lottery result. , when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the second lottery result is derived more than when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. In this case, when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, the game value can be obtained more, and at least the first game value can be obtained by the internal lottery means in the first game state. When a second lottery result is derived, it may be possible to execute a notification for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation.

With such a configuration, even if the player performs the second operation that does not comply with the notification, the player can obtain a profit. can be resolved.

<Navigation in AT state>
In addition, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 24) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 24) on which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and is driven to rotate. , a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 24) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and each of which has one or more roles. Alternatively, internal lottery means for deriving one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results corresponding to losses (e.g., internal winning combination lottery processing), and derivation by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. Based on the drawn lottery result, stop control means (for example, reel stop control processing) for performing stop control to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation was performed; Game value imparting means (for example, medal payout processing) that imparts game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels, and game control means (for example, game state) that can control the progress of the game and change the degree of advantage ), wherein the game control means includes a first game state (for example, normal state) and a second game state different from the first game state (for example , AT state, second chance state, first chance state) can be set, and in the first game state, a specific lottery result ( For example, when the privilege push order bell 6) is derived, the stop operation of the stop button is set to the second operation condition rather than the first operation according to the first operation condition (for example, the RCL stop operation) Therefore, when the second operation (for example, stop operation such as LCR) is performed, more game value (for example, medals) can be obtained, and the game control means controls the first game state When the specific lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the lower the number of times the stop button is stopped by the second operation, the higher the advantage in the second game state. The specific lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, normal order bell) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result ( For example, when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation. Also, when the second lottery result is derived, the game value can be obtained more when the player performs the stop operation of the stop button by the second operation, and the second When the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the game state of (1), a notification (for example, navigation for acquiring 12 cards) for performing the stop operation of the stop button by the first operation It is executable, and when the second lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second gaming state, a notification for causing the stop operation of the stop button to be performed by the second operation (for example , navigation for acquiring 12 cards) can be executed.

According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, when a specific lottery result is derived, it is more advantageous to perform the stop operation of the stop button in the first operation for the AT state, so the first game state , the player can be prompted to perform the first operation, and it is possible to appropriately control the provision of game value such as payout of game media. In addition, in the second game state, in both the case where the first lottery result is derived and the case where the second lottery result is derived, in order to perform notification for performing the second operation, In the second game state, the game value can be easily acquired without worrying about the lottery result, and the satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, when the first lottery result (for example, privilege push order bell 1) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the stop operation of the stop button is performed by the first operation. When the second lottery result (for example, privilege push order bell 2) is derived by the internal lottery means in the first game state, the stop operation of the stop button can be executed in the second operation.

Also, the second game state may be an AT state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily acquire game value without worrying about the lottery result in the AT state, and the satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, notification executed when the first lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means in the second game state, and the second lottery result by the internal lottery means in the second game state The notification performed when is derived may have the same notification mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to easily acquire game value without being conscious of the stop operation, and it is possible to increase the player's satisfaction.

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine 100 according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the "first game state" and "second game state" according to the present invention may be a combination of different game states, for example, normal state, CZ state, AT state, specialized zone, In addition to the ED state, it may be a combination of game states such as RT, AT, ART, bonus, pullback zone for AT and ART, and the like.

In addition, "fulfilling a predetermined condition" according to the present invention is not limited to winning the AT lottery. , internal winning (or prize winning) in a predetermined conditional device, fulfillment of bonus termination conditions, and the like.

In addition, the combination of "first game state" → "predetermined condition is established" → "second game state" according to the present invention is "normal game" → "AT lottery winning" → "AT state" For example, "CZ state" → "AT lottery win" → "AT state", "Bonus" → "AT lottery win" → "AT state", "Normal state" → "Number of games is default The number of games has been reached" → "AT state", "AT state" → "The number of games has reached the default number of games" → "Specialized zone", "Normal game" → "The number of points has reached the default number of points Reached" → "AT state", "AT state" → "The number of points has reached the specified number of points" → "Specialized zone", "AT state" → "The number of points has reached the specified number of points" → "Pseudo-bonus", "Normal state" → "Internally won (or won) a predetermined condition device" → "AT state", "Normal state" → "Internally won (or won) a predetermined condition device ”→“Bonus”, “Bonus”→“Bonus end condition satisfied”→“Normal state”, “Bonus”→“Bonus end condition satisfied”→“AT state”, etc. .

In addition, the "result of operation of the stop button" according to the present invention is not limited to the timing at which the player presses the left reel. (Reverse press), symbols (or symbol combinations) that are stopped by operating the stop button are also included.

In addition, the "ease of acquiring gaming value" according to the present invention is not limited to the ease of adding the number of AT games, and for example, the ease of adding the difference in the number of AT games, the ease of acquiring the number of AT sets, etc. Ease of entry, ease of entering specialized zones, frequency of execution of navigating the push order bell, ease of transition to good RT on ART machine (high and low navigation probability of pushing order promotion replay), good RT ease of transition to, frequency of execution of replay navigation, ease of continuation of a state in which gaming value is easy to acquire (for example, AT, ART, RT, bonus), state in which gaming value is easy to acquire ( AT high probability, ease of transition to AT specialized zone, etc. may be used.

In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention is provided with a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are rotationally driven with a plurality of types of symbols, and is provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels. A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) for individually stopping the rotation of and an internal lottery that derives one lottery result from a plurality of types of lottery results, each of which corresponds to one or more wins or losses means (e.g. internal lottery for winning combination), and after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven, the reel corresponding to the stop button operated to stop is stopped based on the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means. Stop control means (for example, reel stop control) for performing stop control to stop the reels, and game value giving means (for example, medal payout) for giving game values according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means ), and a game control means (for example, game start state processing and game state update processing) that controls the progress of the game and can change the ease of acquiring game value, The game control means selects one game from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state (eg, non-advantageous section) and a second game state (eg, advantageous section) different from the first game state A state can be set, and when a predetermined condition is satisfied while the first game state is set, the first game state is terminated and the second game state is set. is possible, and is set after the predetermined condition is satisfied based on the player's operation result of the stop button in the first game state (for example, the timing at which the player presses the left reel 110) Means that can change the ease of acquiring the game value in the second gaming state (for example, the ease of adding the number of AT games), and the player presses the stop button in the first gaming state It is easier for the player to obtain a profit when the second operation is performed according to the second operation condition than when the first operation is performed according to the first operation condition, and the game control means controls the first operation. When the second operation is performed more than the first operation in the gaming state, the predetermined condition is higher than when the first operation is performed more than the second operation The game machine may be characterized in that the ease of obtaining the game value in the second game state set after being satisfied may change disadvantageously for the player.

According to such a gaming machine, it is possible to change the ease of acquiring game value in the second gaming state after the transition, depending on the operation result of the player's stop button in the first gaming state. It is possible to appropriately control the payout of game value through the first game state and the second game state.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

<Other embodiments>
Other embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings.

In the game machine (slot machine in this example) of the present embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols are subjected to a predetermined rotation start instruction operation (for example, described later). When a start lever operation) is received, rotation is started, and based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation (for example, operation by a stop button described later), the propriety of internal winning of multiple types of hands is determined by lottery. Then, each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and the condition determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the symbol combination when the plurality of reels stop. This game machine advances a series of games in which if a predetermined payout condition is met, game media are paid out and the game is terminated, and if the game is not met, the game is terminated without paying out the game media.

Next, the slot machine of this embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 36 to 42. FIG. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 36 to 42 are used only for the explanation of this embodiment. 36 to 42 have priority.

Also, each example of this embodiment and each example of another embodiment can be applied in combination with each other. In particular, another embodiment in which the same winning combination as the winning combination shown in FIG. Further effects may be obtained by combining each example of the embodiment.

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36 corresponds to an example of the game table of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 attached to the front of the main body 101 and capable of being opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (a left reel 110, a middle reel 111, and a right reel 112) each having a plurality of patterns arranged on its outer peripheral surface (not shown) are housed in the center of the main body 101 and rotate inside the slot machine 100. configured to allow These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, an appropriate number of patterns are printed on strip-shaped members at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to form reels 110 to 112 . As for the symbols on the reels 110 to 112, when viewed from the player, approximately three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. By rotating the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols seen by the player changes. In other words, each of the reels 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be employed in addition to the reel. In addition, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the central part of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed in the symbol display window 113 is arranged on the rear surface of each of the reels 110 to 112 . The backlight is desirably shielded for each pattern so that the individual patterns can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 100, near each reel 110 to 112, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light projecting portion and a light receiving portion is provided. and a light-receiving portion, a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes through. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the positions of the symbols on the reels in the rotational direction are determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbols are displayed on the winning line. The pay line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the pay line 114 to be activated.

The notification lamp 123 informs the player that, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in an internal winning combination lottery, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. It's a lamp to let you know. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment lights up until the bonus game ends after the bonus notification for notifying the bonus determination. Note that the notification lamp 123 may be lit before the bonus is announced (during the bonus or just before the bonus is announced). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert game medals. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins the replay which is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for effect.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . In this embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, one card is inserted up to a maximum of three cards, two cards are inserted when the bet button 131 is depressed, and three cards are inserted when the bet button 132 is depressed. It has become so. The bet button 132 is hereinafter also referred to as a MAX bet button. The bet button 132 also functions as an effect button that can start a certain effect when an operation is received. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as an effect button.

The game medal insertion lamp 129 turns on the number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when the specified number of medals is inserted, the game starts to indicate that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 . The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals to be paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination. In this embodiment, the accumulated number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of 7-segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation executing device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110-112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130-132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110-112 start rotating. An operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137-139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push-down switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the respective reels 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be stopped. By operating it, the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is called stop operation, the first stop operation is called first stop operation, the next stop operation is called second stop operation, and the last stop operation is called third stop operation. The reel to be operated may be called the first stop reel, the reel to be stopped by the second stop operation may be called the second stop reel, and the reel to be stopped by the third stop operation may be called the third stop reel.

Further, the order of stopping operation of the stop buttons 137-139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110-112 is called the operation order or the pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation with the left reel 110 as the first stop reel is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order of the stop operation with the first stop reel as the right reel 112 is called " called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push". A light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitter can be lit to inform the player.

The high navigation state lamp 190 is a lamp that lights up when the AT system game state of the main control unit 300 is in the high navigation state described later. The player can recognize the high navigation state from the lighting mode of the high navigation state lamp 190 .

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove medals when the inserted medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settlement of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and medals placed on the slot machine 100 and ejecting the medals from the medal payout port 155 . The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

Below the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 is provided for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps. A medal payout port 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided below the title panel 162 .

The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A production device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the production device 160.例文帳に追加This production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right and left shutters 163a and 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) changes to the front of the slot machine 100 (game display). (user side).

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

It should be noted that the liquid crystal display device may not be a liquid crystal display device as long as it is configured to be able to display various effect images and various game information. , a reel (drum), or a display device comprising a projector and a screen. In addition, the display screen is rectangular, and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. Although the display screen is rectangular in this embodiment, it may be square. In addition, a decoration (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, so that the display screen looks oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

Note that the notification lamp 123 and the high-navigation state lamp 190 notify the predetermined information by lighting the lamps, but the manner of notification is not limited to the lighting of the lamps. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a partial area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a full liquid crystal slot machine, the area near the reels 110 to 112 may be used). In the following description, the lighting of the notification lamp 123 or the high-navigation state lamp 190 is meant to include notification by other production devices (for example, a display device, etc.) having the same function.

<Circuit Configuration of Control Unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the controller of the slot machine will be described. The control section of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a main control section that controls the progress of the game, and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as "command") sent by the main control section that controls the main effects. and a second sub-controller for controlling various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-controller.

The main control section has an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section and enables communication with the first sub-control section. Information communication between the main control unit and the first sub-control unit is one-way communication, and the main control unit can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit. It is not possible to send signals such as commands to the unit.

The first sub-controller has a basic circuit that receives control commands transmitted by the main controller via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-controller based on the control commands. The first sub-controller controls sound output means (speaker, sound source IC, etc.) and various lamps.

The second sub-controller has a basic circuit that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-controller via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-controller based on this control command. The second sub-controller controls the liquid crystal display device and the like.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be explained.

Symbols displayed on the top of the left reel are symbols on the top left reel, symbols displayed on the middle of the left reel are symbols on the middle of the left reel, symbols displayed on the bottom of the left reel are symbols on the bottom of the left reel, and symbols displayed on the top of the middle reel. The symbol to be displayed is the middle reel top symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle reel is the middle reel middle symbol, the symbol displayed on the middle reel is the middle reel bottom symbol, the symbol displayed on the right reel is the top symbol Right reel top symbols, right reel middle symbols, right reel middle symbols, right reel bottom symbols, and right reel bottom symbols. There are 3 vertically on each reel, for a total of 9.

In this embodiment, one winning line is provided, which is a middle winning line composed of left reel middle symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel middle symbols. A winning line is a line set at a stop position of a symbol visible through a symbol display window, and is a line for determining whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination is displayed. A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “valid line”) is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media.

The slot machine of this embodiment can bet 3 or 2, and when the number of inserted medals is less than 2, none of the winning lines are activated and 3 or 2 medals are placed. Win lines are activated when bets are placed. When the winning line becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever.

Also, the number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line, a right-down winning line consisting of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols and right reel upper symbols. A total of 3 pay lines, which are upward-sloping pay lines, may be set as valid pay lines, or a number of pay lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid pay lines.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. 37(a) and 37(b). FIG. 3(a) shows types of winning combinations (including working combinations), symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, payouts (number of awards) for each winning combination, and remarks. ) is a diagram showing the types of normal pressing order bells and special pressing order bells, and payouts corresponding to each pressing order.

Each of the reels 110 to 112 is provided with a predetermined number of frames (eg, 20 frames) of a plurality of types of symbols (eg, replay symbols, watermelon symbols, cherry symbols, bell symbols, etc. shown in FIG. 37(a)). .

Winning roles of the slot machine 100 include special roles (not shown) (special role 1, special role 2), general roles (replay role, small wins 1 to 4, normal order bell, special order bell), etc. There is Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

Of the winning combinations in this embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations that shift to a special game state in which a predetermined profit is given to the player. Further, the replay combination is a combination that can be replayed without inserting new medals. These winning hands are sometimes referred to as "working hands". Further, "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where a symbol combination of an operating combination that does not involve a payout of medals (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the activated line. Winning a special role 2 and a replay role are included.

The special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are combinations (operating combination) that shift to a special game state by winning a prize. In this example, the special combination 1 is a combination that can be won only in the 3-coin bet game, and the special combination 2 is a combination that can be won only in the 2-coin bet game. It should be noted that no medals are paid out for winning this role. The corresponding symbol combination is, for example, "seven 1-seven 1-seven 2" for special role 1 (BB1) and "BAR-BAR-seven 1" for special role 2 (BB2).

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to this internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM of the main control unit). When the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 1, the main control unit shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 1 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT2). Further, when the flag is set to ON by the internal winning of the special combination 2, the main control unit shifts the game state to the internal winning state of the special combination 2 (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT3).

This flag is kept ON until the internal winning combination is won, and the state in which the internally winning combination is likely to be won in the next and subsequent games. That is, even if the special role is not won in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the special role will be internally won in the game after the next time, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role (for example, special If the winning combination 1 is internally won, the pattern combination of "Seven 1-Seven 1-Seven 2 (BB1)") will be in a state where it is easy to win all together. This special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) will be described later.

The main control unit shifts the game state to a special game state (hereinafter, this state may be referred to as RT4) based on the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 being displayed. Furthermore, in this special game state, when a predetermined number of payouts (in this example, 110 for winning by BB1 and 55 for winning by BB2) are paid out, a replay low probability state (hereinafter, this state will be referred to as RT1) there is).

A "replay combination" is a prize winning combination (operating combination) that can be played in the next game without inserting medals (game media) due to winning, and medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

“Small wins (small wins 1 to 4)” are winning wins in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The combination 2 (cherry) is "cherry-ANY-ANY", etc., as shown in FIG. 37(a). The corresponding number of payouts is also shown in the figure.

The small win 1 (watermelon) and the small win 2 (cherry) are wins that can be won by operating the correct timing. This indicates that any pattern may be used for the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 . In addition, although the details will be described later, the small win 3 and the small win 4 are wins that can be won by operating the correct answer order. There is a case.

<Reel stop control>
Next, the outline of the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be described. For reel stop control, one of a plurality of types of predetermined reel stop control data is selected based on a predetermined condition (result of internal lottery processing for a winning combination), and based on the selected reel stop control data. conduct.

In this embodiment, so-called pull-in control (frame sliding control) is performed. The pull-in control shifts the stop positions of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (the number of symbols) after the player operates the stop buttons 137-139. refers to control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM of the main control unit. Each reel stop data consists of permissive control that permits the symbol combination of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed together on the winning line, and prohibition control that the symbol combination of any winning combination is not displayed together on the winning line. , is roughly divided into.

Examples of the allowable control are, for example, when a winning combination is internally won, or when a special combination is internally won (while the flag is being carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each stop button 137 to 139. Control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is displayed in a uniform manner within the range of the number of frames, even if it is bad. However, since it is only "accepted", there are cases where the symbol combination is not complete depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137-139.

For example, when the small win 1 (watermelon) is internally won, the watermelon pattern is arranged in more than four frames, so if the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is not suitable, the watermelon pattern will be placed on the winning line. Do not stop.

Of course, depending on the arrangement of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 and the number of drawn frames, there are cases where the symbols are aligned 100%. For example, since the replay symbol arrangement interval corresponding to the replay combination is 4 frames at maximum, if the replay combination is internally won, 100% of the winnings are won regardless of the timing.

On the other hand, an example of prohibition control is, for example, when the internal lottery result is a loss and the internal winning of the special role is not in progress (flag carried over), and the timing of operating each stop button 137 to 139 by the player. At best, the control is performed so that the symbol combination of the winning combination is not displayed together within the range of the above number of frames.

<Push order bell>
Next, the normal push-order bell and the special push-order bell will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 37(b).

<Normal push order bell>
When one of the "normal push order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, a plurality of small wins (in this example, a small win 3 and a small win 4) are won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. A symbol combination to be displayed on the winning line is determined. It should be noted that it is possible to internally win the "normal pushing order bell 1-6" even if the set value is any of the settings 1-6.

As shown in FIG. 37(b), each of the "normal pushing order bells 1 to 6" includes six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". , and in this example, 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to one of the six types of pushing orders. The range of the lottery data associated with each of the six types of pushing order is the same.

For example, in the case of internal winning of "normal pushing order bell 1LCR" out of "normal pushing order bell 1", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel. A stop operation for the reel 112 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stopping operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order). In addition, when "normal push order bell 4CRL" of "normal push order bell 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel. A stop operation for the reel 110 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-piece small winning combination (small winning combination 3), "Bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 "Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, if there is a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) that does not follow the 12-card acquisition navigation, "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to one small win (small win 4) will be won. Displayed on the line, one medal is paid out, or if the small winning combination 4 is missed (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), medals are paid out. It will not be done (it will be lost).

In addition, when the stop operation (correct pressing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning one) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), " Bell-Bell-Replay” is displayed on the pay line, and if one medal is paid out or if the small win 4 is missed (the symbol combination corresponding to the small win 4 was not displayed on the pay line case), medals will not be paid out (it will be lost).

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) is performed that does not follow the navigation for winning one, depending on the operation order, "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to the small winning combination 3 will be on the winning line. , and 12 medals are paid out, or "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the 4th small win is displayed on the winning line, and 1 medal is paid out, or the 4th small win is missed. In this case (when the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination 4 is not displayed on the winning line), no medals are paid out (lost).

In the "normal pushing order bells 1 to 6" of this example, 12 small wins (small winning 3) are assigned to one of the 6 types of pushing orders, so "normal pushing order bells 1 to 6" , 12 medals will be paid out with a probability of 1/6. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be greater than 1/6.

<Privilege push order bell>
When one of the "privilege pushing order bells 1 to 6" is internally won, a plurality of small wins (in this example, a small win 3 and a small win 4) are won in duplicate, depending on the player's operation order. A symbol combination to be displayed on the winning line is determined. It should be noted that even if the set value is any one of the settings 1 to 6, it is possible to internally win the "privilege pushing order bell 1 to 6".

As shown in FIG. 37(b), each of the "privilege order bells 1 to 6" has six types of "LCR", "LRC", "CLR", "CRL", "RLC", and "RCL". In this example, one small winning combination (4 small winning combinations) is assigned to one of the six types of pushing orders, and the six types of pushing orders are set. 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to 5 of them. The range of the lottery data associated with each of the six types of pushing order is the same.

For example, in the case of internal winning of "Privilege push order bell 1LCR" among "Privilege push order bell 1", the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel. A stop operation for the reel 112 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stopping operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order). Further, when the "privilege push order bell 4CRL" of the "privilege push order bell 4" is internally won, the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the left reel. A stop operation for the reel 110 is a correct operation (correct pressing order), and other stop operations are incorrect operations (incorrect pressing order).

When the stop operation (correct pushing order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for winning one) that suggests the operation order for winning one small winning combination (small winning combination 4), "Bell-" corresponding to the small winning combination 4 Bell-Replay” is displayed on the winning line, and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, if there is a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) that does not follow the navigation for acquiring one, "Bell-Bell-Bell" corresponding to the 12-card small win (small win 3) will be awarded. displayed on the line.

Also, when the stop operation (correct order operation) is performed according to the navigation (navigation for acquiring 12 cards) that suggests the operation order for winning the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3), the " "Bell-Bell-Bell" is displayed on the winning line, and 12 medals are paid out.

On the other hand, if a stop operation (incorrect answer pushing order operation) is performed that does not follow the navigation for acquiring 12 coins, "Bell-Bell-Replay" corresponding to the small win 4 is displayed on the winning line, One medal is paid out.

In this example, "Privilege push order bells 1-6", since 12 small wins (small win 3) are assigned to 5 out of 6 push orders, "Privilege push order bells 1-6" , 12 medals will be paid out with a probability of 5/6. The winning probability of the 12-card small winning combination (small winning combination 3) is not limited to this example, and may be larger or smaller than 5/6.

<Types of game state>
Next, the types and transitions of game states of the slot machine will be described.

The main control unit of the slot machine can be roughly divided into a low replay probability state (RT1), a high replay probability state and a special prize 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a high replay probability state and a special prize 2 internal winning state ( RT3), and a special game state (RT4). In the present embodiment, these four game states are referred to as RT-based game states. In addition, in the present embodiment, the main control unit also controls a state related to so-called AT (assist time) (hereinafter referred to as AT game state). The sub control unit is designed to set the game state. The game state of the AT system will be described later with reference to FIG. 38(A).

In addition, the replay low probability state (RT1) is a state in which the probability of operating the condition device related to the replay combination does not change (default state), a special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2), and a special combination 2 internal winning state. (RT3) and the special game state (RT4) are also states in which the probability of activation of the condition device relating to the replay combination varies from the default state.

Hereinafter, the RT system game state of the slot machine will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The low replay probability state is the lowest (disadvantageous to the player) game state among the other game states (for example, game states excluding the special game state) in which the internal winning probability of replay is the lowest, and is referred to as the normal game state. There is also

When the special role 1 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination 1 internal winning state (RT2) described later, and when the special combination 2 is internally elected, the state shifts to the special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later. do.

<Special role 1 internal winning state (RT2), Special role 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
Special combination internal winning state (RT2) and special combination 2 internal winning state (RT3) (hereinafter collectively referred to as "special combination internal winning state") are replay low probability states (RT1 ), the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. By doing, it is a game state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

When the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is displayed in the special combination internal winning state, the game moves to a special game state (RT4), which will be described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special game state (RT4) is the most advantageous game state for the player among all the game states.

In the special game state (RT4), when the prescribed number of coins is paid out, the state shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1). Specifically, when the special game state is entered based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special combination 1, when more than 110 medals are paid out, the replay low probability state (RT1) is entered. transition to In addition, when the state is shifted to the special game state based on the display of the symbol combination corresponding to the special role 2, the state is shifted to the replay low probability state (RT1) when more than 55 medals are paid out. .

<Transition of game state of AT system>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be explained.

The game state of the AT system is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode. The high-navigation state is a state in which the probability of operation navigation being executed is higher than in the low-navigation state, and is also called an AT mode.

Here, operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the correct operation order when the player wins internally for the pushing order. That is, operation navigation refers to an effect that notifies the content of a stop operation for obtaining medals, or the content of a stop operation for shifting to an advantageous game state or maintaining an advantageous game state. In this embodiment, operation navigation is executed using a payout number display and effect image display device.

In the present embodiment, the low navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is defined as a state in which the execution probability of manipulation navigation is higher than in the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed and the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed. When the stop operation is performed according to the operation content of the operation navigation, a result advantageous to the player is brought about, so the high navigation state is a game state more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state. Here, the term “advantageous” specifically refers to the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine as compared to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing the game for a predetermined period of time. It refers to the ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball output rate).

In this embodiment, when a certain condition is established in the low navigation state (for example, when winning a winning combination other than losing), the game shifts to the normal state (normal game state) of the high navigation state. After that, as shown in FIG. 38 (A), for example, it shifts to the AT1 state, and after repeating a plurality of sets (for example, 2 sets or 10 sets) of the AT1 state of the first round, the normal state (normal game state) , a route that repeats multiple sets (for example, 10 sets) of the AT1 state, then shifts to the AT2 state (ending state) and then shifts (returns) to the AT1 state for the second round, or a route that transitions (returns) to the AT1 state on the second round, or via the pullback state Then, there is a route that shifts to the normal game state or AT2 state.

In the present embodiment, when it is determined to shift to the AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state), a predetermined number (eg, 50 games) of AT mode games (hereinafter referred to as AT game number) is provided. Further, when a certain condition is established in the high navigation state, the vehicle shifts to the LMT (limit) state.

<AT system state transition>
Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and is called an effect state. Specifically, the production state of the low navigation state is the normal state, and the production state of the high navigation state is the normal state, the final announcement state, the judge state, the withdrawal state, the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state. . Note that the AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the LMT (limit) state are, in principle, states in which the number of paid balls increases.

Here, the limit state is, in principle, the remaining 20 games or less in the high navigation state, that is, the production state from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state (from the 981st game to the 1000th game in the high navigation state It is possible that the production state of is not the limit state). In this embodiment, when the high-navigation state becomes 20 or less games remaining, an ending effect (hereinafter sometimes referred to as "ED effect") suggesting the end of the high-navigation state is executed.

<Production table>
Next, the effect table provided in the first sub-control section will be described.
@
@
@
The storage means (for example, ROM) of the first sub-control unit stores an effect table provided for each effect state. The first sub control unit acquires the effect information (for example, effect state, high navigation state counter, effect state counter, etc.) included in the command received from the main control unit, and refers to the effect table corresponding to the effect state, etc. , to perform an effect according to the effect state counter or the like. For example, when the current production state is the AT1 state, the production table corresponding to the AT1 state (AT1 state production table) is referred to, and the production data for executing the AT1 production is read from the ROM. When the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data is updated.

Also, if the current production state is the judgment state, the production table corresponding to the judgment state (judgment state production table) is referred to, and processing such as reading out production data for executing the judgment production from the ROM is performed. When the performance data needs to be updated, the performance data is updated.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (1)/Overview>
A game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means (e.g., internal winning combination lottery process) capable of deriving the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the game, and a game value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels processing), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6 shown in FIG. reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation When an operation (for example, a forward pressing operation) is performed in the mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the pay line), Said gaming value imparting means, when said plurality of reels are stopped in said first stop mode (for example, payout of one reel), when stopped in said second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 reels) It is configured such that the game value is given more to the player.

In addition, the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous game state (for example, FIG. 38 (A ) and a judgment state regarding whether to shift to the AT state) and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, in FIG. 38 (A) AT2 state (ending state) shown) is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the second The first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, if you win a lottery to transition to the AT1 state), and the second condition includes includes the fulfillment of the second requirement (for example, when winning a lottery to transition to the AT2 state), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (the plurality of reels is stopped in the first stop mode), the advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 transition rate 21 shown in FIG. 38(B)) is that the plurality of stop buttons are The degree of advantage in satisfying the first requirement when the operation is performed in the operation mode (when it is not stopped in the first stop mode) (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 15% shown in FIG. 38 (B)) Advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode) The degree (for example, the AT2 shift rate of 9% shown in FIG. 38(B)) is when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (not stopped in the first stop mode case) (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 11% shown in FIG. 38(B)).

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (1) / specific example>
FIG. 38(B) is a diagram showing a specific example of the advantageous section control (1) when operation navigation is ignored.

The state shown in FIG. 38(B)(1) is the normal state, for example, winning the privilege push order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) This is the state in which the operation navigation prompting is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of shifting to the AT1 state by the transition lottery. The advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 20%, and the AT2 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of shifting to the AT2 state by the transition lottery). The probability (advantage for meeting the second requirement) is 10%.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 38(B)(2) is a state in which the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels is in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Bell-Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line). ), and one medal is paid out.

In addition, in the same state, since the plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), the AT1 transition rate (first ) increased from 20% to 21% (higher advantage), and the AT2 transition rate (advantage for meeting the second requirement) decreased from 10% to 9% (advantageous degree is lower), 1 point is awarded and the total number of points pt is increased from 20 to 21.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 38(B)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, the forward push operation (in the second operation mode). operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, "bell" on the winning line). -Bell-Bell" symbol combination is aligned), and 12 medals are paid out.

Also, in the same state, the plurality of reels were stopped in the second stop mode (the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the first stop mode). , the AT1 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the first requirement) drops from 20% to 15% (lower advantage), and the AT2 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the second requirement) is 10%. to 11% (higher advantage) and no points awarded.

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT1 transition rate decreases, making it difficult to transition to the AT1 state, but the AT2 transition rate increases. This makes it easier to shift to the AT2 state.

When the player does not follow the operation navigation, even a second specific advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not it will shift after the first specific advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) is made disadvantageous. Although it is cruel, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous game state is more advantageous than when the operation navigation is followed. Therefore, the player's desire to play can be maintained until the player's operation error or the like is remedied and the game shifts to the second specific advantageous game state.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37(b)), and the lottery result is the first In the case of the lottery result, if the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels will be in the first stop mode (for example, "Bell -Bell-replay" symbol combination is aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (For example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of reels When it stops in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 cards) than when it stops in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 card), the game value is given more. , and the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous game state (for example, FIG. 38 AT1 state shown in (A) and a judgment state regarding whether to shift to AT state) and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 38 (A ) includes the AT2 state (ending state) shown in ), and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the It is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when winning the lottery for transition to the AT1 state), the second Conditions include fulfillment of the second requirement (e.g., winning a lottery to transition to the AT2 state). In a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which the AT transition such as the 1st G after the transition to the advantageous section has not been determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop The degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the button is operated in the first operation mode (for example, the AT1 transition rate of 21% shown in FIG. 38(B)) is that the plurality of stop buttons Higher than the advantage (for example, AT1 transition rate 15% shown in FIG. 38 (B)) for satisfying the first requirement when the operation is performed in the second operation mode, the plurality of stop buttons The degree of advantage (for example, the AT2 transition rate of 9% shown in FIG. An amusement machine characterized in that it is lower than the advantage (for example, the AT2 shift rate of 11% shown in FIG. 38 (B)) for satisfying the second requirement when the operation is performed in the second operation mode. is.

When the player does not follow the operation navigation, even a second specific advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not it will shift after the first specific advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) is made disadvantageous. Although it is terrible, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state Since the player's operation error or the like can be remedied, the player's willingness to play can be maintained until the game shifts to the second specific advantageous game state.

It should be noted that "satisfaction of the second requirement" is not limited to the case of winning a lottery for transition to the AT2 state, for example, the number of acquired game media reaches a certain number (for example, 1840). included (as well as other examples).

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

In addition, a certain counter (for example, the remaining ceiling counter shown in FIG. 39 (A) and the second counter shown in FIGS. 41 (C) and (D)) related to the satisfaction of the first requirement is provided, and one game A count value of the certain counter may be updated each time the processing is performed, and the notification means may be capable of starting a count display indicating the count value.

Further, when 0 is displayed as the count display after the power failure and the power is restored, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode after the power failure and the power is restored, the numerical value indicated by the count display The count value may match, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode after power failure and power recovery, the numerical value indicated by the count display and the count value match. There may be no cases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player who performed the operation according to the operation navigation, and to alert the player who did not perform the operation according to the operation navigation.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state (eg, non-advantageous section) and an advantageous state (eg, advantageous section) that is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of display of operation navigation, and the advantageous states include , The first specific advantageous gaming state and the second specific advantageous gaming state are included, and in the advantageous state, there is a case where the transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state does not occur after the first specific advantageous gaming state There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the game, and to increase the player's satisfaction.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed may not be lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player who has performed the operation according to the operation navigation.

Moreover, even if the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed, the plurality of reels may stop in the second stop mode.

With such a configuration, even if the operation navigation is ignored, a profit can be given to the player, and the degree of satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, when the second operation navigation is executed, either the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed or the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed However, the effect corresponding to the operation can be executed, and when the first operation navigation is executed, only when the first operation according to the first operation navigation is performed An effect corresponding to the operation may be executable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the difference between the operation according to the second operation navigation and the operation according to the first operation navigation easy to understand by the difference in presentation. In addition to this, the production effect can be enhanced by making the production different.

Further, the game value imparting means is configured not to impart the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. may have been

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states, lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of a role and deriving the lottery result, and a plurality of game machines. a game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the reels; a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels; wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation mode. is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means is arranged such that when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the reels are stopped in the first stop mode. The plurality of game states are configured to impart a large amount of the game value, and the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state, a first specific advantageous game state to which the normal advantageous game state can be shifted, and the first specific advantageous game state. A second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the second condition is When established, it is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the second requirement and when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the first is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the plurality of reels is stopped in the first stop mode The advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stopping mode is lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stopping mode. , It may be a game machine characterized by:

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels. , one of a plurality of game value giving states is set in relation to the game value giving state (for example, the base (so-called machine discount), the acquisition state of the bell for pushing order, the compliance rate of navigation, etc.). and a game value imparting state control means, wherein the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state and a first specific advantageous game state that can be shifted to after the normal advantageous game state. and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, the transition to the first specific advantageous gaming state is possible. , When the second condition is established, it is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, and the second condition includes includes satisfaction of the second requirement, and the plurality of game value provision states includes at least a first game value provision state (for example, a state where the base is 60%) set in the normal advantageous game state. and a second game value provision state (for example, a state in which the base is 80% m), and the game value provision state control means controls a state in which the game value provision state is a certain state (hereinafter referred to as "first state ), the first game value giving state can be set, and the game value giving state is a situation different from the first situation (hereinafter referred to as "second situation") ), the second situation can be set, and the second situation is more advantageous to the player than the first situation with respect to the situation of giving the game value. , in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the number of won (MY) is 0 at the 300th G in the normal advantageous gaming state, etc.), when the first game value giving state is set The advantage for satisfying the first requirement is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the second gaming value provision state is set, and the first gaming value provision state is set, the advantage for satisfying the second requirement is lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the second gaming value provision state is set. It may be a game machine characterized by

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (2)/Overview>
The gaming machine described with reference to FIG. 38(B) is the second stop button when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode). is the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when multiple stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (when they are not stopped in the first stop mode) However, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment can be operated when a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (a plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode). case), the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement is the second It is the same as the advantage for satisfying requirements.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (2) / specific example>
FIG. 38(C) is a diagram showing a specific example of the advantageous section control (2) when operation navigation is ignored.

The state shown in FIG. 38(C)(1) is the normal state, for example, winning the privilege push order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is the state in which the operation navigation prompting is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of shifting to the AT1 state by the transition lottery. The advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 20%, and the AT2 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of shifting to the AT2 state by the transition lottery). The probability (advantage for meeting the second requirement) is 10%.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 38(C)(2) is a state in which the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels is in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Bell-Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line). ), and one medal is paid out.

In addition, in the same state, since the plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), the AT1 transition rate (first (advantage to fulfillment of requirement 2) increased from 20% to 21% (benefit increased), AT2 transition rate (advantage to fulfillment of second requirement) was maintained at 10% (benefit changed not), 1 point is awarded and the total number of points pt is increased from 20 to 21.

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 38(C)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, the forward push operation (in the second operation mode). operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, "bell" on the winning line). -Bell-Bell" symbol combination is aligned), and 12 medals are paid out.

Also, in the same state, the plurality of reels were stopped in the second stop mode (the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the first stop mode). , the AT1 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the first requirement) drops from 20% to 15% (lower advantage), and the AT2 transition rate (advantage for satisfying the second requirement) is 10%. (the advantage does not change) and no points are awarded.

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT1 shift rate decreases and it becomes difficult to shift to the AT1 state, but the AT2 shift rate changes. do not do.

When the player does not follow the operation navigation, even a second specific advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not it will shift after the first specific advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) is made disadvantageous. However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, there is no difference in the degree of advantage in the second specific advantageous game state compared to when the operation navigation is followed. Since it is not provided, the player's desire to play can be maintained until the transition to the second specific advantageous game state is made while relieving the player's operation error or the like.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37(b)), and the lottery result is the first In the case of the lottery result, if the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels will be in the first stop mode (for example, "Bell -Bell-replay" symbol combination is aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (For example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of reels When it stops in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 cards) than when it stops in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 card), the game value is given more. , and the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a first specific advantageous game state (for example, FIG. 38 AT1 state shown in (A) and a judgment state regarding whether to shift to AT state) and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 38 (A ) includes the AT2 state (ending state) shown in ), and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first advantageous game state, and when the second condition is satisfied, the second It is configured to be able to shift to two advantageous gaming states, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when winning a lottery to transition to the AT1 state), and the second condition includes includes the fulfillment of the second requirement (for example, if you win a lottery to transition to the AT2 state), In a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which AT transition such as 1G after transitioning to an advantageous section has not been determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons The degree of advantage (for example, the AT1 shift rate of 21% shown in FIG. higher than the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement (for example, the AT1 shift rate of 15% shown in FIG. The degree of advantage (for example, the AT2 shift rate of 10% shown in FIG. 38(C)) for the satisfaction of the second requirement when the operation is performed in one operation mode is that the plurality of stop buttons are the second A gaming machine characterized in that it is the same as the advantage (for example, the AT2 shift rate of 10% shown in FIG. 38 (C)) for satisfying the second requirement when the operation is performed in the operation mode. .

When the player does not follow the operation navigation, even a second specific advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state) in which it is not known whether or not it will shift after the first specific advantageous game state (for example, AT1 state) is made disadvantageous. Although it is cruel, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the second specific advantageous gaming state is the same as when the operation navigation is followed. Since there is no difference in the advantage, the player's desire to play can be maintained while relieving the player's operation error or the like until the transition to the second specific advantageous game state.

Further, in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the first Even if the advantage in the specific advantageous gaming state is higher than the advantage in the first specific advantageous gaming state when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. good.

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

In addition, a certain counter (for example, the remaining ceiling counter shown in FIG. 39 (A) and the second counter shown in FIGS. 41 (C) and (D)) related to the satisfaction of the first requirement is provided, and one game A count value of the certain counter may be updated each time the processing is performed, and the notification means may be capable of starting a count display indicating the count value.

Further, when 0 is displayed as the count display after the power failure and the power is restored, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode after the power failure and the power is restored, the numerical value indicated by the count display The count value may match, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode after power failure and power recovery, the numerical value indicated by the count display and the count value match. There may be no cases.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction level of the player who performed the operation according to the operation navigation, and to alert the player who did not perform the operation according to the operation navigation.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state (eg, non-advantageous section) and an advantageous state (eg, advantageous section) that is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of display of operation navigation, and the advantageous states include , The first specific advantageous gaming state and the second specific advantageous gaming state are included, and in the advantageous state, there is a case where the transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state does not occur after the first specific advantageous gaming state There may be.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the variation of the game, and to increase the player's satisfaction.

In addition, it is configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the degree of advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed may not be lower than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed.

With such a configuration, it is possible to increase the satisfaction of the player who has performed the operation according to the operation navigation.

Moreover, even if the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed, the plurality of reels may stop in the second stop mode.

With such a configuration, even if the operation navigation is ignored, a profit can be given to the player, and the degree of satisfaction of the player can be enhanced.

In addition, when the second operation navigation is executed, either the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is performed or the case where the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed However, the effect corresponding to the operation can be executed, and when the first operation navigation is executed, only when the first operation according to the first operation navigation is performed An effect corresponding to the operation may be executable.

With such a configuration, it is possible to make the difference between the operation according to the second operation navigation and the operation according to the first operation navigation easy to understand by the difference in presentation. In addition to this, the production effect can be enhanced by making the production different.

Further, the game value imparting means is configured not to impart the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. may have been

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states, lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of a role and deriving the lottery result, and a plurality of game machines. a game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the reels; a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels; wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation mode. is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means is arranged such that when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the reels are stopped in the first stop mode. The plurality of game states are configured to impart a large amount of the game value, and the plurality of game states include a normal advantageous game state, a first specific advantageous game state to which the normal advantageous game state can be shifted, and the first specific advantageous game state. A second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the specific advantageous gaming state is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the second condition is When established, it is configured to be able to shift to the second specific advantageous gaming state, the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement, and the second condition includes the second requirement and when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the first is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, and the plurality of reels is stopped in the first stop mode The advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stopping mode is the same as the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stopping mode. , It may be a game machine characterized by:

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels. and game value provision state control means capable of setting one of a plurality of game value provision states in relation to the provision state of the game value, wherein the plurality of game states are provided. includes a normal advantageous gaming state, a first specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state, and a second specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state. When the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and when the second condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to transition to the second specific advantageous gaming state. The first condition includes satisfaction of the first requirement, the second condition includes satisfaction of the second requirement, and the plurality of gaming value provision states include at least the The game value provision state control means includes a first game value provision state and a second game value provision state that are set in a normal advantageous gaming state, and the game value provision state control means controls the state in which the game value provision state is a certain state (hereinafter referred to as In the case of "first situation"), the first game value giving state can be set, and the game value giving state is a certain situation different from the first situation (hereinafter referred to as "second situation"). The second situation can be set in the case of "second situation"), and the second situation is more important to the player than the first situation with respect to the situation of giving the game value. In a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state, the degree of advantage with respect to the satisfaction of the first requirement when the first gaming value imparting state is set is the second gaming value The advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the provision state is set is higher than the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the first gaming value provision state is set. , is the same as the advantage for satisfying the second requirement when the second gaming value provision state is set.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (3)/Overview>
A game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means (e.g., internal winning combination lottery process) capable of deriving the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the game, and a game value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels processing), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6 shown in FIG. reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation When an operation (for example, a forward pressing operation) is performed in the mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the pay line), Said gaming value imparting means, when said plurality of reels are stopped in said first stop mode (for example, payout of one reel), when stopped in said second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 reels) It is configured such that the game value is given more to the player.

In addition, the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38A) and an advantageous state (for example, in FIG. AT1 state and AT2 state shown) are included, and a first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation counter and an advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 39 (A)) is provided, and one game is played in the advantageous state every time, the count value of the first counter (first count value) can be updated, and a second counter (for example, the ceiling remaining counter shown in FIG. 39A) related to a certain profit provision each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the second counter (second count value) can be updated, and the advantageous state and the lottery result are the first In the case of the lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode), the first and the second count value can be updated, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (the plurality of reels are the first not stopped in the stop mode), only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (3) / specific example>
FIG. 39(A) is a diagram showing a specific example of the advantageous section control (3) when operation navigation is ignored.

The state shown in FIG. 39(C)(1) is the normal state, for example, winning the privilege pushing order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is the state in which the operation navigation prompting is executed.

The count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) in the same state is 900, and the count value (second count value) of the remaining ceiling counter (second counter) in the same state is 550. Here, the ceiling remaining counter is a counter indicating the number of remaining games until reaching the so-called ceiling.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 39(A)(2) is a state in which the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, since the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels is in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol "Bell-Bell-Replay" is displayed on the winning line). ), and one medal is paid out.

In addition, in the same state, since the plurality of reels stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), a high navigation counter (first counter) count value (first count value) is decremented by 1 and updated to 899, and the count value (second count value) of the remaining ceiling counter (second counter) is decremented by 1 and updated to 549 is updated to

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 39(A)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, the forward push operation (in the second operation mode). operation).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, "bell" on the winning line). -Bell-Bell" symbol combination is aligned), and 12 medals are paid out.

Also, in the same state, the plurality of reels were stopped in the second stop mode (the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the first stop mode). , the count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) is subtracted by 1 and updated to 899, but the count value (second count value) has not been updated.

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the count value (first count value) of the high navigation counter (first counter) is updated However, the count value (second count value) of the remaining ceiling counter (second counter) is not updated.

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is severely disadvantageous to the player, but according to this example, the second count value (for example, the ceiling Counter) can be updated, but even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the first count value (for example, the advantageous section counter) is updated in the same way as when the player follows the operation navigation. Therefore, it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player's operation, and to prevent the player from losing motivation to play due to an operation error or the like.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37(b)), and the lottery result is the first In the case of the lottery result, if the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels will be in the first stop mode (for example, "Bell -Bell-replay" symbol combination is aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (For example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of reels When it stops in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 cards) than when it stops in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 card), the game value is given more. , and the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38(A)) and an advantageous state (for example, FIG. 38(A) ) includes AT1 state and AT2 state), and includes a first counter (for example, a high navigation counter and an advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 39 (A)) regarding the advantageous state, and one game is played in the advantageous state The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") can be updated each time it is performed, and a second counter (for example, FIG. 39 ( A) is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as the “second count value”) can be updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state. and the advantageous state and the lottery result are the first In the case of one lottery result, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode in the advantageous state, both the first count value and the second count value The count value can be updated, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode in the advantageous state, one of the first count value and the second count value The gaming machine is characterized in that only the first count value can be updated.

If the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is severely disadvantageous to the player. Even though the count value (for example, the ceiling counter) can be updated, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the first count value (for example, the advantageous section counter), it is possible to ensure the fairness of the player's operation and to prevent the player from losing motivation to play due to an operation error or the like.

Further, the advantageous states include a normal advantageous gaming state and a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state shown in FIG. 38(A) or AT state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state). (judgment state regarding whether or not) is included, and when the first condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and the first condition includes the satisfaction of the first requirement is included, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a state in which AT transition such as 1G after the transition to the advantageous section has not been determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of The degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the stop button is operated in the first operation mode is The degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement may be higher.

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

Further, the advantageous state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and when the second count value reaches the second value, the first specific advantageous gaming state may be configured to transition to

Further, when the first count value reaches a first value (for example, a ceiling value), it is configured to shift to the first specific advantageous gaming state, and in the advantageous state, the first operation navigation configured such that the second count value reaches the second value before the first count value reaches the first value when an operation according to may have been

In addition, the advantageous state includes a second specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state) that can be shifted after the first specific advantageous gaming state, and can be granted in the first specific advantageous gaming state The amount of the game value may be larger than the amount of the game value that can be given in the second specific advantageous game state.

Further, when an operation according to the first operation navigation is performed in the advantageous state, the advantageous state ends before the first count value reaches the first value. There may be cases.

Further, the count display indicating the first count value (for example, the advantageous section counter display) can be started in the middle of the advantageous state, and the count display indicating the second count value (for example, the remaining ceiling counter display). ) may be displayable until some point before the count display indicating the first count value is started.

Further, the game value imparting means is configured not to impart the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. may have been

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states, lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of a role and deriving the lottery result, and a plurality of game machines. a game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the reels; a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels; wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation mode When the operation is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means determines whether the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode rather than in the first stop mode. is configured to provide a large amount of the game value, the plurality of game states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of operation navigation display, and a first game state related to the advantageous state counter, and configured to be able to update the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") each time one game is played in the advantageous state, and a certain profit A second counter relating to awarding is provided, and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") can be updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state. , when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode in the advantageous state and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the first count value and the second count both count values of the value are updatable, and when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the first of the first count value and the second count value This game machine is characterized in that only the count value of is renewable.

<Ending/Summary when ignoring operation navigation>
A game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means (e.g., internal winning combination lottery process) capable of deriving the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the game, and a game value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels processing), and a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6 shown in FIG. reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation When an operation (for example, a forward pressing operation) is performed in the mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the pay line), Said gaming value imparting means, when said plurality of reels are stopped in said first stop mode (for example, payout of one reel), when stopped in said second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 reels) It is configured such that the game value is given more to the player.

Also, the advantageous states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38A) and a first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, FIG. 38 (A)) and a second type of specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT2 state shown in FIG. 38 (A)) that can be shifted after the first type of specific advantageous gaming state. The first type of specific advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the normal advantageous gaming state in terms of execution of the operation navigation, and the second type of specific advantageous gaming state is more advantageous than the normal advantageous gaming state. The advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and in the normal advantageous gaming state, when the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons When only the game operated in the second operation mode is played, the normal advantageous game state is shifted to the second type specific advantageous game state without going through the first type specific advantageous game state. It is possible.

<Ending when ignoring operation navigation / specific example>
FIG. 39(B) is a diagram showing a specific example of the ending when operation navigation is ignored.

The state shown in FIG. 39(B)(1) is the normal state, for example, winning the privilege push-order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is the state in which the operation navigation prompting is executed.

The AT1 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of transitioning to the AT1 state by a transition lottery) is 20%.

The states shown in subsequent FIGS. 39B(2) to 39(B)(3) do not follow the operation navigation prompting the player to perform the reverse pressing operation (operation in the first operation mode), for example, forward pressing. This is a state in which a stop operation has been performed by operation (operation in the second operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (in this example, "bell" on the winning line). -Bell-Bell" symbol combination is aligned), and 12 medals are paid out.

Also, in the same state, the plurality of reels were stopped in the second stop mode (the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the first stop mode). Therefore, it has not transitioned to the AT1 state (the first kind of specific advantageous game state).

The following FIG. 39(B)(4) shows a transition from the normal state to the bonus ending AT2 state (the second type of specific advantageous game state).

Although not shown, in the normal state shown in (B) (3) of FIG. Since it was stopped in the stop mode (the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line) (it was not stopped in the first stop mode), the AT2 state of the bonus ending (the second type of specific advantageous gaming state).

On the other hand, in FIG. 39(B)(5), from the normal state shown in FIG. It is a state that has shifted to a state (second type of specific advantageous game state).

In this example, the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation, and the plurality of reels is in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line). mode), the AT1 state (first type of specific advantageous gaming state) is transferred to the normal ending AT2 state (second type of specific advantageous gaming state).

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is not an error, so it is difficult to call attention to the player, and the operation that does not follow the operation navigation is continued unintentionally. However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is possible to obtain the second type of advantage Since it is possible to shift to the game state, the player's desire to play can be maintained while relieving the player's operation error or the like until the shift to the second kind of advantageous game state.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, a privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37(b)), and the lottery result is the first In the case of the lottery result, if the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels will be in the first stop mode (for example, "Bell -Bell-replay" symbol combination is aligned), and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation), the plurality of reels are in the second stop mode (For example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of reels When it stops in the second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 cards) than when it stops in the first stop mode (for example, payout of 1 card), the game value is given more. The plurality of game states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state in terms of the execution of operation navigation, and the advantageous state includes a normal advantageous game state (for example, FIG. 38 ( A)), a first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state shown in FIG. 38 (A)), and the first type of specific A second type of specific advantageous game state (for example, AT2 state shown in FIG. 38 (A)) that can be shifted after the advantageous game state is included, and the first type of specific advantageous game state is more than the normal advantageous game state The state is a game state that is more advantageous for the execution of the operation navigation, and the second type of specific advantageous game state is a game state that is more advantageous for the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous game state. Yes, in the normal advantageous gaming state, the first lottery as the lottery result When the selection result is derived, when only the game in which the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode is performed, the first type of specific advantageous game state is changed from the normal advantageous game state. The game machine is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the second type of specific advantageous game state without passing through.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is not an error, so it is difficult to call attention to the player, and the operation that does not follow the operation navigation is continued unintentionally. However, according to the amusement machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is possible to obtain the ball out. Since it is possible to shift to two types of advantageous game states, the player's desire to play can be maintained while relieving the player's operation error or the like until the player shifts to the second type of advantageous game state.

Also, when a certain condition is established, it is configured to be able to shift to the first type of specific advantageous gaming state, the certain condition includes satisfaction of certain requirements, and the normal advantageous gaming state In a certain state (for example, a state in which an AT shift such as the first G after a transition to an advantageous section has not been determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are in the first operation mode. is more advantageous for satisfying the certain requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode than for satisfying the certain requirement when the operation is performed in It may be higher.

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

Further, the second type of specific advantageous gaming state may be an advantageous gaming state that can be continued until the advantageous state ends.

Further, a counter relating to the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the counter can be updated. The count display indicating the count value may not be updated when the operation according to the operation navigation is not performed.

Further, the second type of specific advantageous gaming state includes at least a first ending (for example, a normal ending shown in FIG. 39(B)(5)) and a second ending different from the first ending. (for example, the bonus ending shown in FIG. 39 (B) (4)), and the amount of profit that can be given to the player in the first ending (for example, the number of games, the frequency of navigation (push order bell winning frequency of time notification, etc., execution frequency of full navigation, payout amount of medals, etc.) are greater than the amount of profit that can be given to the player in the second ending, and the first operation navigation in the advantageous state If the following operation is not performed, even if the transition to the second ending is performed without transitioning to the first ending when transitioning to the second type of specific advantageous gaming state good.

In addition, in the second type of specific advantageous gaming state, a set value suggestion display that suggests a set value (for example, a display that suggests that the set value is even (or odd), a set value that is a specific set value ( setting 6, etc.) can be displayed, and the frequency at which the setting value suggesting display is displayed in the first ending is the frequency at which the setting value suggesting display is displayed in the second ending may be higher than the frequency of

Further, in the second ending, the setting value suggestion display may not be displayed.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state from among a plurality of game states, lottery means capable of performing a lottery regarding internal winning of a role and deriving the lottery result, and a plurality of game machines. a game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the reels; a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels;
wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation mode When the operation is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the gaming value imparting means determines whether the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode rather than in the first stop mode. is configured to provide a large amount of the gaming value, and the advantageous states include a normal advantageous gaming state, a first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state, and the first A second type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the type of specific advantageous gaming state is included, and the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is more favorable than the normal advantageous gaming state. It is a game state that is advantageous for execution, and the second type of specific advantageous game state is a game state that is more advantageous for execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous game state, and in the normal advantageous game state, When the first lottery result is derived as the lottery result, only the game in which the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode is performed, the normal advantageous game state is changed to the first The gaming machine is characterized in that it is possible to shift to the second type of specific advantageous gaming state without going through the type of specific advantageous gaming state.

Further, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment includes control means capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and game value imparting means for imparting a game value according to the stop mode of the plurality of reels. , a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels; and a game value giving state control means capable of setting one of the states from the above, wherein the advantageous state includes a normal advantageous game state and a first state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous game state. A type of specific advantageous gaming state and a second type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the first type of specific advantageous gaming state are included, and the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is more important than the normal advantageous gaming state. The advantageous game state is a game state that is more advantageous for the execution of the operation navigation, and the second type of specific advantageous game state is more advantageous for the execution of the operation navigation than the normal advantageous game state. The second type of specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state relating to an ending, and the plurality of game value imparting states includes at least a first game value imparting set in the normal advantageous gaming state. state and a second game value provision state, and the game value provision state control means controls the first state when the game value provision state is in a certain state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"). can be set, and when the game value provision state is in a certain situation different from the first situation (hereinafter referred to as "second situation"), the second game A value awarding state can be set, the second situation is more advantageous to the player than the first situation in terms of the game value awarding situation, and a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state. , when the second game value imparting state is set, the second type of specific advantageous gaming state is entered from the normal advantageous gaming state without going through the first type of specific advantageous gaming state. This game machine is characterized by being movable.

<Bell hit production / overview>
A game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means (e.g., internal winning combination lottery process) capable of deriving the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the game, and a game value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device).

In addition, the lottery results include the first lottery result (for example, the privilege pushing order bell 6 shown in FIG. 37(b)) and the second lottery result (for example, FIG. 37 (b) includes the normal pushing order bell 1), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the operation in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels Stop in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, perform the second operation mode. When an operation (for example, forward pressing operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value When the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode (e.g., payout of 12 coins), the number of reels is higher than when the plurality of reels stop in the first stop mode (e.g., payout of 1 coin). is configured to give the game value of

Further, when the lottery result is the second lottery result, if the operation in the third operation mode (eg, reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels will be placed in the third stop mode (eg, on the winning line " When the game is stopped in a mode in which the symbol combinations of "Bell-Bell-Replay" are aligned), and when the lottery result is the second lottery result, an operation in a fourth operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation) is performed. A plurality of reels are stopped in a fourth stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means determines that the plurality of reels are stopped in the third stop mode. It is configured such that more game value is given when the game is stopped in the fourth stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) than when stopped in the stop mode (for example, 1 payout). .

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a certain effect that can be displayed when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result (for example, in FIG. 39(C) The certain effect includes a case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result, and a case where the lottery result is the first lottery result. In the case of the second lottery result, when the plurality of reels stop in the fourth operation mode, an effect that suggests success (for example, an effect that displays a character string "success"), or The probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (eg, 5/6) is higher than the probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode (eg, 1/6) ) is higher.

<Bell hit production / specific example>
FIG. 39(C) is a diagram showing a specific example of the bell hit effect.

In the state shown in FIG. 39(C)(1), in the AT1 state, for example, the normal pressing order Bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), and the operation navigation prompting the bell hitting effect (certain effect) is performed. It is in an executed state.

In the bell hit effect (certain effect) of this example, when the correct answer operation (in this example, an LCR operation in which 12 medals are paid out) is performed using the liquid crystal display device 157, AT1 is performed. Information suggesting continuation of the state (in this example, a display including a character string "Continue AT1 with the correct pressing order!") and guessing the pressing order while keeping all the correct pressing orders confidential. Display (in this example, display of "???") is performed.

Also, although illustration is omitted, when the player's stop operation matches the correct push-order operation (in this example, the LCR push-order operation) (when the player's stop operation hits), The symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned (stopped in the fourth stop mode), 12 medals are paid out, and an effect suggesting success (for example, a display containing the character string "success") is displayed. production) is started.

In this example, when winning the normal push-order bell 1 (the second lottery result is derived), the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct push-order operation (LCR push-order operation) is 1/6.

On the other hand, in the state shown in (C)(2) of FIG. 4, in the AT1 state, for example, winning the privilege push-order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), and an operation prompting the bell hit performance (certain performance) is performed. Navi is running.

In the bell hit effect (certain effect) of this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is used to perform the correct answer operation (in this example, one of LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, and RLC in which 12 medals are paid out). (In this example, a display including a character string “Continue AT1 with the correct pressing order!!”), and all the correct pressing orders are indicated. A pressing order guessing display (in this example, the display of "???") is carried out to allow the player to guess in secret.

Also, in this example, the player performs a bell guessing effect (certain effect) based on the normal pushing order bell 1 (second lottery result) or a bell guessing effect based on the special pushing order bell 6 (first lottery result). In order to be able to discriminate whether it is an effect (a certain effect), the bell guessing effect (a certain effect) based on the privilege pushing order bell 6 (first lottery result) has different pressing order guess display modes. (In this example, the square lines surrounding the "?" are thickened). With such a configuration, it is possible to suggest that the player has won the first lottery result, which is advantageous to the player, by means of the display mode of the bell hitting performance (certain performance), thereby enhancing the player's sense of expectation. can be done.

Also, although not shown, when the player's stop operation matches the correct order operation (in this example, any one of LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, and RLC) (when the player's stop operation is If you win), the pattern combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line (stopped in the second stop mode), 12 medals are paid out, and an effect that suggests success (for example, , an effect of displaying a character string “success”) is started.

That is, in this example, when the normal push-order bell 1 is won (the second lottery result is derived), the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct push-order operation (LCR push-order operation) is 1/6, and when winning the privilege push-order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), the player's stop operation is the correct push-order operation (any of LCR, LRC, CLR, CRL, and RLC). Since the probability of coinciding with the pressing order operation) is 5/6, the probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode in a certain game is higher than the probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode. more likely to be stopped at

The gaming machine according to the present embodiment performs operation navigation in which all 1-card hands are aligned, and as a result, the player is forced to miss the 12-card hand. According to this, since it is possible to execute a certain effect in relation to the operation navigation, it is possible to reduce the dislike of the operation navigation, and it is possible to eliminate the dissatisfaction of the player.

It should be noted that the second lottery result is not limited to the normal pushing order bell, and if there is a pushing order combination other than the first lottery result, the other pushing order combination may be applied.

FIG. 39(C)(3) is a diagram showing modification 1 of the hit bell effect, and FIG. 39(C)(4) and (5) are diagrams showing modification 2 of the bell hit effect. be.

In the bell guessing effect (certain effect) explained with reference to (1) and (2) of FIG. 11C, all the correct pressing orders are concealed and the player guesses the correct pressing order display ("??????"). ”) is shown, but as in Modification 1, some of the non-correct keystrokes are disclosed and other part of the correct keystrokes are concealed and the player is allowed to guess the keystrokes. In the production including the correct guess display (in this example, the display of "x??" indicating that the first stop operation is not the left stop button and suggesting that the second and third stop operations are concealed) There may be.

By performing such an effect, when the first lottery result is derived, it is possible to increase the probability that the player's stop operation coincides with the correct pushing order operation, and the player's desire to play can be improved. can.

Further, as in Modified Example 2, a part of the correct order is disclosed, and the other part of the correct order is concealed to allow the player to guess the correct order (in this example, the first stop operation is The display of "? 1?" indicating that it is a middle stop button and suggesting that the second and third stop operations are concealed) may be included.

By performing such an effect, when the first lottery result or the second lottery result is derived, it is possible to increase the probability that the player's stop operation matches the correct pushing order operation, and the player's game can be improved. Motivation can be improved.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ) and effect means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.), wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, the privilege order shown in FIG. 37(b) Bell 6) and a second lottery result different from the first lottery result (for example, normal pushing order bell 1 shown in FIG. In this case, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a first operation pattern (for example, a reverse push operation), the plurality of reels will win a certain winning combination (hereinafter referred to as "first winning combination"). (for example, a mode in which the "Bell-Bell-Replay" symbol combination is aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a second operation pattern (for example, , forward push operation) are performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second mode corresponding to the winning of the first winning combination (for example, the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line). mode), and when the lottery result is the second lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a third operation pattern (for example, reverse push operation), the plurality of reels Stop in a third stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line) that does not correspond to the winning of a certain winning combination (hereinafter referred to as "second winning combination") Then, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a fourth operation pattern (for example, forward pressing operation), the plurality of reels are set to a fourth stop mode (for example, , the pattern combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the number of operation patterns to be the second operation pattern is larger than the number of operation patterns to be the fourth operation pattern. , the game value provision means, when the lottery result is the first lottery result and more game value is awarded when the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode than in the first stop mode, and the lottery result is the In the case of a second lottery result, a larger game value is awarded when the plurality of reels stop in the fourth stop mode than in the third stop mode. and the effect means is capable of executing a certain effect (for example, the bell hit effect shown in FIG. 39(C)) at least when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result. The certain effect configured and executed when the lottery result is the first lottery result is a successful effect (for example, " The certain effect executed when the lottery result is the second lottery result is that at least the plurality of reels are in the fourth stop mode. The game machine is characterized in that the performance is successful when the machine stops.

Since operation navigation is performed so that one-card role is complete, and as a result the player is forced to drop out of the 12-card role, there is a risk of dissatisfaction with the player. Since it is possible to execute a certain effect in relation to the operation navigation, it is possible to reduce the disgust of the operation navigation and eliminate the dissatisfaction of the player.

The first winning combination and the second winning combination may be the same winning combination or may be different winning combinations. Further, the difference in the operation pattern is not limited to the order of pressing the stop button, and may be the difference in stop timing of the stop button. Therefore, for example, a specific pattern on the reel (for example, red and blue patterns) may be aimed at and the stop operation (eye pressing) may be performed. In this case, a success effect is executed, and a successful effect is not executed when red-red-blue are aligned.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state and an advantageous state that is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the display of the operation navigation, and the advantageous state includes the normal advantageous game state and the normal advantageous game state. A first type of specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted to later is included, and when a certain condition is established, the transition to the first type of specific advantageous gaming state is possible, and the certain condition includes: In the case that a certain requirement is satisfied, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation pattern in a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result. The degree of advantage for satisfying the certain requirement in the case where the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation pattern is higher than the degree of advantage in satisfying the certain requirement in the case where the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation pattern. may be

Further, the certain effect is a effect that is started before the operation of the plurality of stop buttons, and is an effect that makes the player guess the successful operation pattern of the plurality of stop buttons. It can be something.

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result, when the operation in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, on the winning line). , and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, an operation in a second operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation) is performed. and the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means determines that the plurality of reels are stopped in the second It is configured such that more game value is given when the game is stopped in the second stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) than when stopped in one stop mode (for example, 1 payout). , When the lottery result is the second lottery result, when the operation in the third operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in the third stop mode (for example, on the winning line (a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned), and when the lottery result is the second lottery result, an operation in a fourth operation mode (for example, forward pressing operation) is performed. The plurality of reels are stopped in a fourth stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value imparting means determines that the plurality of reels are stopped in the third When the game is stopped in the fourth stop mode (for example, 12 payouts) than in the case of stopping in the stop mode (for example, 1 payout), more gaming value is given, One of the plurality of types of display is a certain effect that can be displayed when the lottery result is the first lottery result or the second lottery result (for example, a bell shown in FIG. 39(C) The certain effect includes a case where the plurality of reels stop in the second stop mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result, and a case where the lottery result is the second lottery result. An effect including a display suggesting success (for example, a display including a character string "success") when the plurality of reels stop in the fourth operation mode in the case of a lottery result, The probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (eg, 5/6) is higher than the probability that the plurality of reels are stopped in the fourth stop mode (eg, 1/6) in a certain game. 6) may be higher.

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

In addition, the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38A) and an advantageous state (for example, in FIG. (AT1 state, AT2 state shown) are included, and if the advantageous state has the right to continue, the certain effect may be executed at least once in the advantageous state.

In addition, the lottery result includes a third lottery result (for example, another winning combination) that is different from both the first lottery result and the second lottery result, and the certain effect is The effect may be performed in some cases even when the lottery result is the third lottery result.

Further, the advantageous state includes an AT state, and in a period of the advantageous state but not the AT state, the first operation navigation is executed when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is possible, and in the period of the advantageous state and the AT state, the execution of the certain effect may be started when the lottery result is the first lottery result.

Further, the game value imparting means is configured not to impart the game value when the lottery result is the first lottery result and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode. It may be one that has been

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (4)/Overview>
A game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means (e.g., internal winning combination lottery process) capable of deriving the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the game, and a game value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and effect means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, a liquid crystal display device , speakers, etc.).

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6 shown in FIG. reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation When an operation (for example, a forward pressing operation) is performed in the mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the pay line), Said gaming value imparting means, when said plurality of reels are stopped in said first stop mode (for example, payout of one reel), when stopped in said second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 reels) It is configured such that the game value is given more to the player.

In addition, a first game (for example, a three-piece bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number (for example, three) and a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, two) wherein the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the first number is greater than the second game The game is more advantageous for the player.

In addition, the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38A) and an advantageous state (for example, in FIG. (AT1 state, AT2 state shown) are included, and a first counter (for example, high navigation counter and advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 39 (A)) related to the advantageous state is provided, and one game is performed in the advantageous state each time, the count value of the first counter (first count value) can be updated, and the second counter (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 41C and 41D) relating to the advantageous state each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the second counter (second count value) can be updated, and in the advantageous state, the plurality of When the reels are stopped in the first stop mode, both the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the plurality of reels are in the advantageous state. Only the first count value out of the first count value and the second count value can be updated if not stopped in the first stop mode.

One of the plurality of types of effects includes a first scene (for example, scene 1 shown in FIG. 40A) and a second scene (for example, scene 2 shown in FIG. 40A). and when the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the first scene is produced, the first game in the first game It is possible to start the execution of the production of the second scene, and when the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the second game in the second game When execution of the effect of the second scene is not started and then execution of the first game is started, execution of the effect of the second scene can be started in the first game, In the game after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. Even if the second scene is stopped (even in a game in which the plurality of reels are not stopped in the first stop mode), execution of the second scene effect can be started in the game.

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (4) / specific example>
FIGS. 40A to 40C are diagrams showing a specific example of the advantageous section control (4) when ignoring operation navigation, and FIG. is a diagram showing an example of transition of scenes in the interlocking effect.

Here, the interlocking effect means a effect that is continuously (or intermittently) executed over a plurality of games, and is composed of a plurality of scenes including a first scene and a second scene. For example, the interlocking effect shown in FIG. 40A is composed of three scenes, scene 1, scene 2, and scene 3, and scene 2 further includes scenes 2-1, 2-2, 2-3, and so on. It consists of multiple scenes including

In this example, when the execution of the 3-bet game (first game) is started after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) is performed, scene 2 (second scene) is executed in the game. scene) can be started. Also, when the execution of the 3-bet game (first game) is started after the game in which the effect of this scene 2 (first scene) is performed, scene 3 (second scene) ) can be started.

That is, in this example, when the 3-coin bet game is continued during execution of the interlocking effect, the scene of the interlocking effect progresses.

FIG. 40(C) is a diagram showing an example of scene transition of interlocking performance when a double bet game is executed in continuous performance.

In this example, when the execution of the two-bet game (second game) is started after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) is performed, scene 2 (second scene) is executed in the game. scene) is not started, and next time the execution of the 3-bet game (first game) is started, the execution of scene 2 (second scene) is started in the game. It is possible.

Also, when the execution of the 3-bet game (first game) is started after the game in which the effect of this scene 2 (first scene) is performed, scene 3 (second scene) ) can be started.

That is, in this example, when the two-coin bet game is executed during execution of the interlocking effect, the scene of the interlocking effect does not progress. It should be noted that, when the two-coin bet game is executed while the interlocking effect is being executed, the next scene of the interlocking effect may be displayed for a moment.

FIG. 40(B) is a diagram showing an example of scene transition in interlocking production when operation navigation is executed in continuous production.

In the example shown in (B) (1) of the same figure, execution of a 3-bet game (first game) is started in the game after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) was performed, and the scene Along with starting the execution of the effect of 2-1, for example, winning the privilege push order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), operation navigation to prompt the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) This is an example in which the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the execution of the effect of scene 2-2 is started with the first stop operation (in this example, pressing the right stop button), followed by the second stop operation (in this example, pressing the middle stop button). The execution of scene 2-3 is started with the pressing operation of ), and then the execution of scene 2-4 is triggered with the third stop operation (pressing operation of the left stop button in this example). have started.

Although illustration is omitted, in this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, on the winning line " The game is stopped when the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned), and one medal is paid out.

On the other hand, in the example shown in (B)(2) of the same figure, execution of a 3-bet game (first game) is started in the game after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) was performed. , Starts execution of the effect of scene 2-1, for example, wins the privilege pushing order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived), and an operation to prompt the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) This is an example in which navigation is executed and the player performs a stop operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) is used as a trigger to start the execution of the effect of scene 2-2, followed by the second stop operation (in this example, the middle stop button The execution of the scene 2-3 is started with the operation of pressing the right stop button), and then the execution of the scene 2-4 is started with the third stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button). have started. Further, in this example, since the visibility of the effect of the scene 2-4 is reduced, during the effect of the scene 2-4, at least part of the winning effect executed after the third stop operation is not executed. Configure.

Although illustration is omitted, in this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward push operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation, the plurality of reels were in the second stop mode (this example Then, the game is stopped in a mode where the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and 12 medals are paid out.

As described above, in this example, the first scene (in this example, scene 1) is a game after the game in which the effect is performed, and the lottery result is the first lottery result (in this example, the privilege In the case of pushing order bell 6), the plurality of reels were not stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combination of "bell-bell-replay" is aligned on the winning line) (the player operates Even in a game in which a stop operation is performed without following the navigation, execution of the second scene (scene 2 in this example) can be started in the game.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is not an error, so it is difficult to call attention to the player. However, according to this example, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the continuous effect can be progressed. Therefore, it is possible to keep the player's desire to play without making the player feel embarrassed.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ) and production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of types of production, wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, FIG. 37 (b) includes a privilege push order bell 6), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a second mode. When the operation (for example, forward pressing operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the pay line), and the When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the game value imparting means provides the second stop than the case where the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout). A first game in which a larger game value is given when the game is stopped in a mode (e.g., 12 payouts), and the number of game media bet is a first number (e.g., 3) (e.g., 3-bet game) and a second game (e.g., 2-bet game) in which the number of game media bets is a second number (e.g., 2). The number of and the second number are different numbers, the first game is a game more advantageous for the player than the second game, and the plurality of game states include a normal state ( For example, a normal state shown in FIG. 38 (A)) and an advantageous state state (for example, AT1 state and AT2 state shown in FIG. A first counter (for example, a high navigation counter and an advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 39A) relating to an advantageous state is provided, and the advantageous state Each time one game is played in the state, the count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value"). ) relating to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 41(C) and (D), a counter that counts the number of AT remaining times during AT, an AT transition a counter that counts a certain count value for the game), and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state. and when the execution of the first game is started in the advantageous state, both the first count value and the second count value can be updated, When execution of the second game is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the advantageous The states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a certain specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state. A specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and when a certain condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the certain specific advantageous gaming state, and the certain condition includes , including satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, if you win the lottery to transition to the AT1 state or AT2 state), and a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state (for example, AT transition such as 1G after the transition to the advantageous section is not determined) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode for satisfying the first requirement The advantage is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode, and is one of the plurality of types of effects. is a production composed of a plurality of scenes including a first scene (for example, scene 1 shown in FIG. 40 (A)) and a second scene (for example, scene 2 shown in FIG. 40 (A)), When the execution of the first game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene can be started in the first game, When the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the production of the first scene is performed, the execution of the production of the second scene is not started in the second game, and the following When the execution of the first game is started in the first game, the first game It is possible to start execution of the production of the second scene, in the game after the game in which the production of the first scene was performed, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of The amusement machine is characterized in that the performance of the second scene can be started in the game even when the stop button is operated in the second operation mode.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is not an error, so it is difficult to call attention to the player. However, according to the game machine according to the present embodiment, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, it is possible to continue By proceeding with the presentation, the player can maintain his desire to play without feeling embarrassed.

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

Further, when the operation according to the first operation navigation is not performed in the advantageous state, only the count display indicating the first count value (for example, the remaining ceiling counter display) can be updated, A count display indicating the second count value may not be updated.

Further, the specific advantageous gaming state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and is configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state, When a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, an effect corresponding to each operation can be executed, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. When the player is hit, an effect corresponding to each operation may not be executed.

Also, in the second game, when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, when one medal is paid out) Even if there is, it may be possible to start a display suggesting the total amount of game value given in the advantageous state (for example, display of an image including a character string "500 coins won").

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (5)/Overview>
A game machine according to the present embodiment (for example, a slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, a main control unit) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states, and an internal winning combination. A lottery means (e.g., internal winning combination lottery process) capable of deriving the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the game, and a game value imparting means (e.g., medal payout) that imparts a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels processing), a plurality of stop buttons provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, and display means capable of executing a plurality of types of effects (for example, a liquid crystal display device etc.) and

Further, when the lottery result is the first lottery result (for example, the privilege push-order bell 6 shown in FIG. reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the second operation When an operation (for example, a forward pressing operation) is performed in the mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the pay line), Said gaming value imparting means, when said plurality of reels are stopped in said first stop mode (for example, payout of one reel), when stopped in said second stop mode (for example, payout of 12 reels) It is configured such that the game value is given more to the player.

In addition, a first game (for example, a three-piece bet game) in which the number of bets on the game medium is a first number (for example, three) and a game in which the number of bets on the game medium is a second number (for example, two) wherein the first number and the second number are different numbers, and the first number is greater than the second game The game is more advantageous for the player.

Further, the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, the normal state shown in FIG. 38(A)) and an advantageous state (for example, in FIG. AT1 state shown) is included, and a first counter related to the advantageous state (for example, a high navigation counter and an advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 39 (A)) is provided, and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, The count value (first count value) of the first counter is configured to be updatable, and the second counter relating to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 41(C) and (D) ), each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the count value of the second counter (second count value) can be updated, and in the advantageous state, the plurality of reels is the When stopped in the first stop mode, both the count values of the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the plurality of reels are in the first state in the advantageous state. Only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated if not stopped in the stop mode.

Further, one of the plurality of types of display is a specific display (for example, a warning display shown in FIG. 41A) which is a display regarding attention to the player and is not an effect display. When the second game is played, the specific display is displayed, and in a certain state in the normal advantageous game state and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons is the second game. is configured so that the specific display is not displayed even when an operation is performed in the operation mode of .

<Advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation (5)/concrete example>
41(A) and (B) are diagrams showing a specific example of the advantageous section control (5) when operation navigation is ignored.

As shown in FIG. 4A, in this example, in the 3-coin bet game (first game), a warning display (a certain display) is displayed to the player to suggest that the game is a 2-coin bet game. However, in the two-coin bet game (second game), it is possible to display a warning display (a certain display).

In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 4B, execution of a two-coin bet game (second game) is started in the game after the game in which scene 1 (first scene) was performed. The push order bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived), operation navigation is performed to prompt the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), and the player performs the reverse push operation (first operation) This is an example in which a stop operation was performed without following the operation navigation prompting the operation in the mode.

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) is triggered to display a warning display (a certain display), followed by the second stop operation (in this example, the middle stop button ) to display a warning display (a certain display) triggered by a third stop operation (in this example, a right stop button pressing operation) to display a warning display (a certain display). it's shown. Also, in this example, after the third stop operation, the warning display (a certain display) is erased, and the execution of the scene 1 effect is started.

On the other hand, although illustration is omitted, the execution of a three-coin bet game (first game) is started, for example, winning the privilege pushing order bell 6 (first lottery result is derived), reverse pushing operation (first If the player performs a stop operation without following the operation navigation that prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode), a warning is issued. The display (some display) is configured not to be displayed.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is not an error, so it is difficult to call the player's attention. Although it may embarrass the player, according to this example, it is possible to display a certain display (warning display) in the second game (two-bet game) that requires a warning. However, if the player does not follow the operation navigation, a certain display (warning display) is not performed, so that the player is not embarrassed and the player's desire to play can be maintained. can.

As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 36) includes control means (for example, the main control section) capable of setting one game state out of a plurality of game states. A lottery means (for example, internal winning combination lottery processing) that can derive the lottery result by performing a lottery related to the internal winning of a role, and a game value giving means that gives a game value according to the stop mode of a plurality of reels. (for example, medal payout processing), and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 36) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. ) and production means (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) capable of executing a plurality of types of production, wherein the lottery result includes a first lottery result (for example, FIG. 37 (b) is included, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of stop buttons can be operated in the first operation mode (for example, reverse push operation) When executed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a first stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line), and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in a second operation mode. When an operation (for example, forward pressing operation) is performed, the plurality of reels are stopped in a second stop mode (for example, a mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), and the game value When the lottery result is the first lottery result, the awarding means is more likely to be in the second stop mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, one payout) A first game (e.g., payout of 12 coins) is configured to award a larger game value when the game is stopped (e.g., payout of 12 coins), and the number of bets on the game media is a first number (e.g., 3 coins) (e.g., , 3-bet game) and a second game (for example, 2-bet game) in which the number of game media bet is a second number (for example, 2), and the first number and the second number are different numbers, the first game is a game more advantageous for the player than the second game, and the plurality of game states include a normal state (for example, normal state shown in FIG. 38(A)), and advantageous state states (for example, AT1 state and AT2 state shown in FIG. 38(A)) that are more advantageous than the normal state for the execution of operation navigation, and the advantageous state Equipped with a first counter (for example, a high navigation counter and an advantageous section counter shown in FIG. 39 (A)), and in the advantageous state The count value of the first counter (hereinafter, referred to as "first count value") each time one game is played. ) relating to the advantageous state (for example, the second counter shown in FIGS. 41(C) and (D), a counter that counts the number of AT remaining times during AT, an AT transition a counter that counts a certain count value for the game), and the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is updated each time one game is played in the advantageous state. and when the execution of the first game is started in the advantageous state, both the first count value and the second count value can be updated, When execution of the second game is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value of the first count value and the second count value can be updated, and the advantageous The states include a normal advantageous gaming state (for example, a non-AT state in an advantageous section) and a certain specific advantageous gaming state that can be shifted after the normal advantageous gaming state. A specific advantageous gaming state is a gaming state that is more advantageous with respect to the execution of the operation navigation, and when a certain condition is satisfied, it is configured to be able to shift to the certain specific advantageous gaming state, and the certain condition includes , including the satisfaction of the first requirement (for example, when winning a lottery to transition to the AT1 state or AT2 state), a certain state in the normal advantageous gaming state and the lottery result is the first lottery result , the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode is determined by the degree of advantage with respect to the satisfaction of the first requirement when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. is higher than the advantage for satisfying the first requirement in the case where the first requirement is satisfied, and one of the plurality of types of display is a specific display that is a display regarding attention to the player and is not a production display (for example, 41 (A)), and when the second game is played, the specific display is displayed, and a certain state in the normal advantageous game state (for example, after transition to an advantageous section) in the case where the AT transition has not been determined for the 1st game, etc.) and the lottery result is the first lottery result, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode; Also, the game machine is configured so that the specific display is not displayed.

Even if the player performs an operation that does not follow the operation navigation, it is not an error, so it is difficult to call the player's attention. Although this may embarrass the player, according to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, a certain display (warning display) is provided in the second game (2-bet game) that requires a warning. While enabling the display of , by not performing a certain display (a warning display) when the player does not follow the operation navigation, the player does not feel embarrassed and the player's desire to play. can be sustained.

In addition, a notification means capable of notification (for example, a liquid crystal display device, a speaker, etc.) is provided, and the notification means prompts the operation in the first operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. It is configured to be able to execute first operation navigation (for example, operation navigation that prompts a reverse push operation), and the notification means performs operation in the second operation mode when the lottery result is the first lottery result. (for example, operation navigation prompting forward pressing operation) may be executed.

In addition, a rendering means capable of executing a plurality of types of rendering is provided, and one of the multiple types of rendering is a first scene (for example, scene 1 shown in FIG. 40(A)) and a second scene. (For example, scene 2 shown in FIG. 40A) is an effect composed of a plurality of scenes, and execution of the first game is started after the game in which the effect of the first scene is performed. In this case, the execution of the second scene effect can be started in the first game, and the execution of the second game is started after the game in which the first scene effect is performed. In this case, the execution of the second scene effect is not started in the second game, and when the execution of the first game is started next, the first game is executed in the first game It is possible to start execution of the production of the second scene, in the game after the game in which the production of the first scene was performed, and when the lottery result is the first lottery result, the plurality of Even when the stop button is operated in the second operation mode, execution of the second scene effect may be started in the game.

With such a configuration, even if the player does not follow the operation navigation, the player is not embarrassed by proceeding with the continuous performance, and the player's desire to play is maintained. be able to.

Further, the specific advantageous gaming state includes a first specific advantageous gaming state (for example, AT1 state), and is configured to be able to execute the second operation navigation in the first specific advantageous gaming state, When a plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, an effect corresponding to each operation can be executed, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. When the player is hit, an effect corresponding to each operation may not be executed.

Also, in the second game, when the operation according to the second operation navigation is not performed and the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, when one medal is paid out) Even if there is, it may be possible to start a display suggesting the total amount of game value given in the advantageous state (for example, display of an image including a character string "500 coins won").

FIG. 41(C) is a time-series diagram showing an example of a three-coin bet game in the AT state, and FIG. 41(D) is a time-series example of a two-coin bet game in the AT state. Fig. 3 shows.

In this example, the second state (AT state in this example) is an advantageous state, and the advantageous state is a state more advantageous to the player than the first state (normal state in this example). is provided with a first counter relating to the advantageous state (for example, the first counter shown in FIGS. 41(C) and (D), an advantageous section counter), and each time one game is played in the advantageous state, the The count value of the first counter (hereinafter referred to as "first count value") is configured to be renewable. For example, as shown in FIG. When the execution of (for example, a 3-coin bet game) is started, both the count values related to the first count value and the count display (for example, the remaining ceiling counter, etc.) are updated. configured, and when execution of the second game (for example, a two-bet game) is started in the advantageous state, only the first count value is updated, and the count value related to the count display is not updated. configured as

Further, in this example, in the advantageous state, it is configured to be able to shift to any one of a plurality of advantageous game states, and one of the plurality of advantageous game states is an advantageous game state. state, provided with a second counter (for example, the second counters shown in FIGS. 41(C) and (D)) relating to the certain advantageous state, each time one game is played in the first advantageous state , the count value of the second counter (hereinafter referred to as "second count value") is configured to be updateable, and one of the plurality of types of display is an image showing a certain value (hereinafter referred to as "first display", for example, first display d1 shown in FIGS. 41(C) and (D)), and one display among the plurality of types of display is the A display including an image representing an updated value of a certain value (hereinafter referred to as a “second display”; for example, a second display d2 shown in FIG. 41(C)), wherein the certain value is the It is a value related to the second count value, and for example, as shown in FIG. , both the count values of the first count value and the second count value are updated, and the second display can be displayed in the first game, for example, FIG. , when execution of the second game (for example, a two-coin bet game) is started in the certain advantageous state, one of the first count value and the second count value Only the first count value is updated and the second display is not displayed in the second game.

<Modified example of advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, a modification of the advantageous section control when ignoring operation navigation will be described.

FIG. 42(A) is a diagram showing Modification 1 of the advantageous section control when operation navigation is ignored.

In the state shown in FIG. 42(A)(1), in the AT1 state, for example, winning the privilege push order bell 5 (the first lottery result is derived), the RLC stop operation (operation in the second operation mode) ) is executed. Note that the AT2 transition rate in the same state (the winning probability of transitioning to the AT2 state by a transition lottery, the degree of advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is 30%.

The subsequent state shown in FIG. 42(A)(2) is a state in which the player has performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the RLC stop operation (operation in the second operation mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the stop operation of the RLC, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, "Bell-Bell-Bell" on the winning line). 12 medals are paid out.

In addition, in the same state, since the plurality of reels stopped in the second stop mode (in this example, the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the winning line), the AT2 transition rate (first ) increased from 30% to 31% (increasing advantage).

On the other hand, in the state shown in FIG. 42(B)(3), the player does not follow the operation navigation prompting the RLC stop operation (operation in the second operation mode). This is a state in which a stop operation has been performed in (operation in mode).

In this example, since the player performed the stop operation by the forward pressing operation without following the operation navigation prompting the stop operation of the RLC, the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode (in this example, " The game is stopped when the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned), and one medal is paid out.

Also, in the same state, a plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (the mode in which the symbol combination of "Bell-Bell-Replay" is aligned on the winning line) (not stopped in the second stop mode). Therefore, the AT2 transfer rate (advantage for satisfying the first requirement) is reduced from 30% to 29% (the advantage is lowered).

That is, in this example, when the stop operation is performed according to the operation navigation, the AT2 shift rate increases and the AT1 state is easily shifted to the AT2 state, but the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation. In this case (when operation navigation is ignored), the AT2 shift rate decreases, making it difficult to shift from the AT1 state to the AT2 state.

In addition, as shown in (A) (4) of the same figure, when the stop operation is performed without following the operation navigation (when the operation navigation is ignored), the AT2 shift rate may be maintained (AT2 shift without changing the rate).

FIG. 42(B) is a diagram showing a modified example 2 of the advantageous section control when operation navigation is ignored.

In the example shown in FIG. 42(B)(1), for example, the operation navigation bell 6 is won (the first lottery result is derived) and the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode) is prompted. , and the player performs the stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, pressing the right stop button) triggers a certain effect (in this example, displaying a character string "Good!" and outputting a sound effect). However, when triggered by the following second stop operation (in this example, pressing the middle stop button) and third stop operation (in this example, pressing the left stop button), nothing is displayed. is doing.

Further, in the example shown in FIG. 42(B)(2), for example, winning the privilege pushing order bell 6 (the first lottery result is derived) prompts the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is an example in which the operation navigation is executed and the player performs the stop operation without following the operation navigation prompting the reverse push operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button), the second stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the middle stop button), and the third stop operation (in this example, the right It is configured so that nothing is displayed when the user presses the stop button).

The example shown in FIG. 42(B)(3) is, for example, an operation to win the privilege push order bell 5 (the first lottery result is derived) and to prompt the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode). This is an example in which navigation is executed and the player performs a stop operation according to the operation navigation prompting the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button) triggers the first effect (in this example, the display including the character string "Good!" and the output of sound effects). Subsequently, the second stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) triggers a second effect (in this example, a display including a character string “Good!” and output of a sound effect) is started, followed by the third stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the middle stop button) as a trigger for the third production (in this example, the display including the character string “Let’s do it!” And the sound effect output) has started.

In the example shown in FIG. 42(B)(4), for example, winning the privilege push-order bell 5 (the first lottery result is derived), and the operation prompting the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode) This is an example in which navigation is executed and the player performs the stop operation without following the operation navigation prompting the RLC stop operation (operation in the first operation mode).

In this example, the first stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the right stop button) triggers the first effect (in this example, the display including the character string "Good!" and the output of sound effects). Subsequently, the second stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the middle stop button) triggers a second effect (in this example, a display including a character string “What are you doing!” output), and subsequently, when the third stop operation (in this example, the operation of pressing the left stop button) is used as a trigger, nothing is displayed.

Note that the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the slot machine 100 according to the above embodiment. Therefore, for example, the advantageous state is not limited to the AT1 state or the AT2 state, and may be another game state. Also, the first game is not limited to the 3-coin bet game, and the second game is not limited to the 2-coin bet game. Also, the first counter is not limited to the advantageous section counter, and may be another counter relating to an advantageous state. Further, the attention-calling display may be other images or the like instead of characters. Also, the game value is not limited to game media such as medals, and may be a privilege (winning an AT game, granting an AT game, etc.) advantageous to the player.

Further, in the above embodiment, when the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the first operation mode, the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode, and the plurality of stop buttons are operated in the second operation mode. However, depending on the stop position of any one of the plurality of reels (for example, the left reel), the plurality of reels will stop in the first stop mode. It may be configured to determine whether to stop at , or to stop in the second stop mode. That is, the first operation mode and the second operation mode may have the same pressing order (for example, left-center-right), but may differ in the stop timing of the left reel. Further, in the above embodiment, the first stop mode and the second stop mode are selected, but the third stop mode (for example, failure) may be selected.

Also, the game machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed game machine. Here, the "enclosed game machine" is one that circulates game balls enclosed in the game machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub-control unit, and the second sub-control unit may be configured on a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub-control unit may be configured to allow two-way communication. good. Further, while bi-directional communication is enabled between the main control section and the first sub-control section, communication from the first sub-control section to the second sub-control section may be unidirectional communication.

Moreover, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention are merely enumerations of the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects of the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. are not limited to those listed. Further, by applying the content described in one configuration among the multiple configurations described in the embodiments to another configuration, the width of the game may be expanded.

100 slot machine 110-112 reel 113 display window 130-132 bet button 135 start lever 137-139 stop button 157 effect image display device 272, 277 speaker 420 various lamps 300 main control unit 400 first sub-control unit 500 second sub-control Department

Claims (1)

display means;
A door body that is provided on the front of the game table and can be opened and closed,
a detecting means capable of detecting the open/closed state of the door;
an operating means;
A game machine comprising
The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to a closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state,
The detection means is means capable of changing the detection state to an open detection state when the door body is in an open state,
By performing a predetermined operation on the detection means, the detection state of the detection means is set to the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator,
When the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, when a certain operation is performed on the operation means, the display for management can be started to be displayed,
When the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, even if the certain operation is performed on the operation means, the display of the management display cannot be started. and
Even if the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, even if the certain operation is performed on the operation means in the state where the game value is inserted. , is configured so that the display of the management display cannot be started,
The display means is a means capable of displaying an indication regarding door opening,
When the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detecting means is in the open detection state, display of the door opening can be started,
When the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the display regarding the door opening is displayed, the certain operation is performed on the operation means. and the management display is configured to be able to start displaying,
When the door body is in the open state, the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state, and the management display is displayed, the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state. Also, the management display is configured to be continuously displayable,
A playground characterized by:

Images